all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 |
|
Appendix 1 | Users Manual | 2.23 MiB | October 12 2003 | |||
1 |
|
Appendix 2 | Users Manual | 3.31 MiB | October 12 2003 | |||
1 |
|
Chapter 2a | Users Manual | 1.63 MiB | October 12 2003 | |||
1 |
|
Chapter 2b | Users Manual | 1.31 MiB | October 12 2003 | |||
1 |
|
Chapter 2c | Users Manual | 739.68 KiB | October 12 2003 | |||
1 |
|
Chapter 2d | Users Manual | 984.84 KiB | October 12 2003 | |||
1 |
|
Chapter 2e | Users Manual | 859.48 KiB | October 12 2003 | |||
1 |
|
Chapter 3 | Users Manual | 836.03 KiB | October 12 2003 | |||
1 |
|
Chapter1 | Users Manual | 1.09 MiB | October 12 2003 | |||
1 |
|
User Installation Manual | Users Manual | 248.36 KiB | ||||
1 | Block Diagram | |||||||
1 | External Photos | |||||||
1 | Internal Photos | |||||||
1 | Internal Photos | |||||||
1 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 | Operational Description | |||||||
1 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 | Cover Letter(s) | September 01 2004 | ||||||
1 | Test Report | |||||||
1 | Test Setup Photos |
1 | Appendix 1 | Users Manual | 2.23 MiB | October 12 2003 |
Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Appendix A: Sample Statement of Work (SoW) The following is an example of a Statement of Work. The Statement of Work outlines the general activities that must be conducted in order to complete the installation and commissioning tasks for a Ripwave Base Station. Example:
Statement of Work for Standard Installation Services The following statement of work will be used to outline the areas of responsibilities for the Navini Networks antenna (known as the RFS) and Base Station (known as the BTS) installations to be completed with Navini Networks Client (referred to as Client in this document). Client may choose to hire a contractor or tower crew to assist with its activities. Navini Networks has no formal contract relationship with the contractor, who will be managed by Client. The following work items are suggested content only - - final scope and terms to be negotiated directly with Client. Navini Networks support personnel will be on site for the entire installation and commissioning process, and will provide technical expertise, information, and recommendations with respect to site design and installation. It is recommended that contractor have a Non-Disclosure Agreement (NDA) in place with Client and Navini Networks prior to execution of work. Contractor shall not publicly disclose any information concerning this deployment or trial with any other parties, unless approved in writing in advance by Client and Navini Networks. Navini Networks 1. Provide Field Engineer to consult with Client and Contractor for planning efforts. Review Site design sketches and BOM prepared by others. 2. Review network architecture information (connection diagram and logical addresses) prior to start of installation. 3. Review Sweep results with Client and contractor. Sweep to be provided of RFS after shipment, of coax cables and RF path on tower, and of cables and RFS after installation, before power up. 4. Review AC and DC power system installation. Review DC power system test with Client and contractor. 5. Review backhaul circuit installation test results with Client. 6. Review GPS antenna and cable installations. 7. Review and Verify Cable and Antenna System Installation Work 8. Site walk with contractor and Client for Punchlist. 9. Load EMS software on Client supplied workstation, and verify connectivity to BTS. Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 109 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. 10. Provide BTS installation Chassis and Cards. 11. Apply power to BTS and perform all power up, BTS calibration verification checks, commissioning and initial testing of Navini Networks system. May use EMS on local laptop. 12. With assistance of Client, Perform Drive Test / Coverage Verification. 13. With assistance of Client, perform data rate testing at mutually specified locations 15 for Omni, 5 for each panel RFS. 14. With client, integrate BTS into backhaul network and verify operation. 15. Closeout / Customer Acceptance package, including inventory of hardware. 16. Navini Networks to provide own tools and test equipment. 17. Clean job site daily. Client / Contractor Work Items 1. Perform Site survey at each site. 2. Prepare Installation sketch and Bill of Materials (BOM) for each site. Note that these are not sealed construction drawings. 3. Client / Contractor Site Design and Bid Walk. 4. Material Procurement. 5. Acquire building permits. 6. Inside Network cabling from demark to BTS rack 7. AC power installation (provide dedicated 115 VAC 20 A circuit for each BTS, dual outlet receptacle). 8. Air conditioning work or other hut electrical work. 9. 24 VDC rectifier installation, cabling to BTS chassis, cabling to AC circuit breaker. Test 24 VDC system (note: do not apply power to BTS). 10. Mount 19 TELCO rack inside hut (base anchors, or overhead brackets or both) 11. Provide core drilling and furnish and install feed through panel for coax cables, unless already existing. Seal holes using similar materials to other existing feed-through at each site. 12. Install grounding inside hut for rack and 24 VDC system. Install ground bus bar inside hut entry per drawings. Install ground bus bars on antenna structure and ground coax cables per sketch. 13. Install and apply coax cables and connectors. This includes main coax runs on tower, plus coax jumpers at antenna and at hut, as specified by drawings. Recommend and Install all cable hangers and supports, and grounding, per standard practice in use at tower location. Install surge protectors per design sketches and BOM. 14. Sweep test coax cables at designated sweep frequencies. 15. Install power and data cable from antenna to BTS. 16. Weather seal all outside connections. 17. Recommend, furnish and install mounting structure (arm assembly) to stand-off Navini RFS from tower. Standoff assembly to include pipe mount for antenna mount. Install Navini RFS on arm on tower. Connect to coax cables and provide sweep of cable / RFS assembly. Provide photographic documentation of tower top installation work. 18. Provide equipment and cable labeling as required. 19. Install (2) GPS antennas on ice bridge (or other agreed upon location). Furnish and install any required brackets or pipe mounts. Install GPS coax cables and connectors from GPS 110 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide antenna to BTS. items. required. 20. Site walk at completion with Client and Navini, create Punchlist; clear applicable punchlist 21. Arrange disposal of trash 22. Provide RF coverage analysis plots before start of installation. Provide model tuning, if 23. Provide architecture document before start of installation, including connection diagram and logical network element assignments (IP addresses, PVCs, etc.). 24. Set Up and Verify all network equipment and backhaul circuits. 25. Set Up and Verify Operation and connectivity of EMS computer. 26. Provide one resource to assist with drive testing and location data rate testing. 27. Provide all end user / CPE provisioning in EMS after initial testing. 28. Provide all end user interface and troubleshooting. 29. Monitor EMS / alarms. Forward trouble issues to Navini call center. 30. Contractor and Client to provide own tools, computers, and test equipment. Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 111 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. 112 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Appendix B: Sample Responsibility Assignment Matrix
(RAM) The following is an example of a Responsibility Assignment Matrix (RAM). The RAM is a tool for capturing who will do what to get systems deployed and turned up. It provides an easy-to-read and follow tabular format. Each of the activities in the list must be addressed in order to complete the installation and commissioning tasks for a Ripwave Base Station. 1 = Primary Responsibility 2 = Secondary Responsibility S = Supply I = Install Item # Task / Activity Navini Client Other Notes MARKET PLANNING and RF ENGINEERING 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Develop coverage objectives Provide Hardware Specifications Provide Link Budget Prepare Preliminary Coverage Plots Interference Analysis / Noise Floor Link Specific Channel Assignments Review / Approve RF Design SCT Filing fees SCT licensing / clearing Contract RF consulting engineering Obtain SCT Test Permit NETWORK ENGINEERING & BACKHAUL 1 2 3 Network Requirements Network Architecture Provisioning Guidelines Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 113 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Item # Task / Activity Navini Client Other Notes 4 5 6 7 8 9 IP / data Address Assignment / management Review / Approve Network Design Network Architecture backhaul ATM layer Provisioning / management Order Circuits Order equipment for backhaul / interface 10 Backhaul Network Test SITE ACQUISITION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Identify BTS candidates in search ring Identify CPE Candidates per ring Identification of Zoning requirements Select BTS sites Negotiate and close lease Pay lease costs Obtain any building permits if required Arrange Site Access SITE DESIGN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Site Survey BTS sites Prepare Site Design Sketches / Layout Prepare BOM Review Design / Approve A&E Selection and management Prepare / approve A&E drawings Tower Structural Analysis Contractor Qualifications and Selection 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 114 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Item # Task / Activity Navini Client Other Notes 9 10 11 Contractor walk through Obtain / Review bids / Award contract Obtain Building permits or other approvals LOGISTICS / SHIPPING / DELIVERY 1 2 3 4 Create Logistics Plan Ship Navini supplied Equipment to designated warehouse Deliver Equipment to Specific Sites Disposal of Shipping materials CONSTRUCTION / INSTALLATION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Antenna Mounts / brackets Antennas (Navini RFS) Coax Cable / Connectors Power / Signal Cable / Connectors (BTS to RFS) Ground Kits Surge protectors/Ground Buss Bars GPS 4-Way Splitters for multiple BTS installed at one site. BTS Equipment Racks / Enclosures DC Power System 24VDC @ 60 Amps for each BTS 10 Batteries / UPS 2 1 2 S S 1 1 1 1 1 1 S, I I S, I I S, I S, I S, I S, I S, I S, I Navini will assist and supervise installation from the ground. 1 per BTS. Navini to supply surge protector for the power and data cable. Client to supply surge protectors for coaxial feedlines. 2 4-Way Splitters needed for 3-sector installation. Need to confirm indoor installation. Enclosure not required indoors. Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 115 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Item # Task / Activity Navini Client Other Notes 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Intra rack cabling Electrical Circuits Electrical wiring from panel to rack Electrical (conduit, distribution panels, etc.) Environmental Equipment Miscellaneous Hardware BTS cages / cards Network Router Network Ethernet Switch with ATM interface EMS Server / workstation EMS client workstation (for techs) S, I EMS client workstation (for Navini) S, I Server for DHCP and network applications CPE User PC with Ethernet and/or USB Card Provide Construction Supervisor 27 Provide Installation Resources CONSTRUCTION 1 2 3 Site Preparation / Infrastructure Pull Cables Install Connectors and Grounding S, I S, I S, I S, I S, I S S, I S, I S, I S, I S, I S 1 1 1 1 1 Navini will supervise installation of Navini equipment. Client contractors. Navini will install the BTS in the client installed rack/cabinet. Navini will provide technical guidance for installation of the RFS. S 2 2 2 116 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Item # Task / Activity Navini Client Other Notes 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Install Surge Protectors Test / Sweep Coax Install mounts / brackets Install Racks Electrical power to Rack Backhaul to rack Environmental (if required) Quality Assurance Inspections / Punch List Close all Punch List Items Provide POTS line for technician use EQUIPMENT COMMISSIONING & INTEGRATION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Inspect / Test Cabling / Connections Install Rack Mount Power System / Card Cages Test DC System Plug cards in BTS Load EMS / Configure Boot BTS Provision EMS / BTS / CPE Test Operation Integrate Backhaul Verify Operation Router: Configure / test DHCP Server: configure / test EMS Client: Configure / Test 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 117 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Item # Task / Activity Navini Client Other Notes 14 Configure monitoring for routers TESTING 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Determine Network Test Criteria Determine RF Test Criteria Generate Acceptance Test Plan (ATP) Review Test Plan Supply Test Equipment HP/Agilent E4402B Spectrum Analyzer with Floppy Storage Option, HP/Agilent 8648C RF Signal Generator, Tektronix TDS 3012B Scope Execute Trial Test Plan and capture data Provide Vehicle and Driver for System Drive Testing Analyze test data and write report Review Report, Trial test results END USER ENGAGEMENT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Prepare End User profile Develop User Procedures Recruit and Sign Up Users Distribute CPE kits Develop User Surveys Survey Users, collect data Issue reports SUPPORT & SERVICES 1 2 System Training for Service Provider Monitor Network 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Based on trial agreement. Based on trial agreement. Some tests will utilize built in test capability. 118 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Item # Task / Activity Navini Client Other Notes 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 End User Contact (answer phones) Fault Determination and Isolation Performance Reporting Field Repairs / Replacements (if needed) Shipping for Repairs / Replacements Spares Install Hardware Upgrades (if needed) 10 Install Software Upgrades (if needed) 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 Client to provide Level 1 support. Spares count TBD. Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 119 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. 120 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Appendix C: Sample Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) Site Deployment Work Breakdown Responsibility Navini Networks In-House Contractor Customer 3rd Party Item No. Activity 1 2 3 4 5 6 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 5.10 5.11 5.12 5.13 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 System Design Criteria Established RF Design Requirements Established Site Configuration / BTS & RFS Requirements Established Backhaul / T1 Requirements Established Customer NOC / Operations Requirements Established Network Design Requirements Established Software Requirements Established Hardware Requirements Established Site Selection Process Candidate Identification / Site Selection RF Propagation / Coverage Analysis Interference Analysis / Intermod Study Drive Test / Coverage Verification Site Survey / Constructability Review Zoning Analysis FAA / FCC / ASAC Compliance Reviews / Submittals Site Acquisition and Leasing Master License Agreements Site License Agreements Lease and Exhibit B Development Work Rents and Payments Entry and Testing Agreements Phase 1 Environmental Screen NEPA Checklist State Historical Preservation Organization Review Site Design and Development Design Coordination / Site Design Walks A&E Drawing Package Development Site Survey - 2C Soils Report Tower / Foundation Design Structural Analysis Permit and Const Drawing Package Review and Approval Zoning Permits Construction Permits - Building & Electrical Material Procurement Bill Of Materials From Approved Construction Drawings Vendor Selection Bids / Quotes Requisitions / Purchase Orders Tower, Mounts, Lightning Protection, Lighting, Cable Ladder, Safety Climb,. BTS - with Rack (IBTS), with Enclosure (OBTS) RFS - Active, Passive Cables, Connectors, Mounting Hardware, Surge Protection AC Power Equipment DC Power Equipment Telco Equipment Grounding Equipment and Materials Delivery Coordination / Warehousing / Logistics Facilities Orders Electric Power Service Order Site Walk / Engineering Electric Power Service / Equipment Order Telephone Service Order Site Walk / Engineering Telco Service / Equipment Order Continued on next page..... Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 121 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. 7 8 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9 7.10 7.11 7.12 7.13 7.14 7.15 7.16 7.17 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 8.8 8.9 8.10 8.11 8.12 Site / System Construction Vendor Selection Bids / Quotes Requisitions / Purchase Orders Pre-Construction Walkthrough Site Preperation Work - Clear, Grub, Foundation Work Tower Delivery and Offload Tower Installation OBTS / Shelter Delivery and Installation Site Materials Delivery and Offload Power Equipment Installation Telco Equipment Installation Grounding System Installation Grounding System Test and Verification Fencing and Security System Installation Site Finish Work - Fencing, Landscaping, Punchlist Construction Work Closeout / Customer Acceptance - Site Construction Equipment Installation Work Material Delivery to Site Install RFS(s) Install Antenna System - Cable, Supports, Surge and Grounding Protection Test and Verify Cable and Antenna System Installation Work IBTS Installation - Shelves, Cards, Power, Grounding AC Power Equipment Installation and Testing DC Power Equipment Installation and Testing Telco / T1 Equipment Installation and Testing BTS Testing EMS / Customer Operations Equipment Installation Punchlist Installation Work Closeout / Customer Acceptance - Equipment Installation Work 9 10 System Testing / Optimization Customer Acceptance / Turnover X X 122 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Appendix D: Site Candidate Evaluation Form NAVINI NETWORKS SITE EVALUATION FORM PN - 40-00091-00 Site Name Date FSE SITE INFORMATION COMPANY NAME ADDRESS SITE OWNER SITE CONTACT NO. GPS COORDINATES ANT TYPE (OMNI, PANEL) ENCLOSURE TYPE (HUT, ETC) TOWER TYPE (SS, MP,ETC) SITE ACCESS RESTRICTIONS DRIVE TO DIRECTIONS BTS Space Availability (3' x 3') Room for Expansion BTS Type/Size of Cabinet required 110VAC, 20A Available/Distance AC Outlet Available/Distance 24VDC, 60A Available/Distance Breaker(s) Required Sub-metering Required Ground Available/Distance Gnd Buss Bar Available/Distance Cable Entry Available Cable Routing Distance Kind of Entry Material Kind of Sealing Required Site Plans Available Cable Tray Available Cable Hangers Required Floor/Wall Drilling Permitted Airconditioning Available Telco/LAN/WAN Available Demarc Location/Distance Room has Adequate Lighting Room has Adequate Ventilation Any Door Entry Restrictions Enclosure Access Crane/Heavy Eqpmt Required OMNI PANEL 2.3GHZ 2.4GHZ 2.5GHZ 2.6GHZ LAT LONG 24HRS 8-5PM ELEV (AMSL) HEIGHT (AGL) FEET FEET OTHER SITE CONSTRUCTION INFORMATION x Y E S INDOOR Y E S Y E S Y E S Y E S Y E S Y E S Y E S Y E S YES YES YES YES YES YES NO OUTDOOR x AC DC NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO FEET FEET FEET FEET FEET FEET FEET FEET YES YES YES Ground YES NO NO NO Elevator NO DOOR DIMENSION OTHER Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 123 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. NAVINI NETWORKS SITE EVALUATION FORM Site Name 0 TOWER/ANTENNA CONSTRUCTION INFORMATION Proposed Antenna Height Cable Run Length to entry port Ant Space Available (10' spacing) Special Bracket Required Cable Hangers Required Crane/Heavy Eqpmt Required Structural Test Required Interference Test Required GPS Location Available GPS Comments / Details Detailed Tower Description FEET FEET YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO COMMENTS COMMENTS OTHER OTHER OTHER OTHER OTHER OTHER CABLE RUN LENGTH IN FEET TOWER PICTURE 124 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Comments Comments NAVINI NETWORKS SITE EVALUATION FORM Site Name 0 SITE MAP / SKETCH GPS ANTENNA LOCATION Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 125 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Comments Comments NAVINI NETWORKS SITE EVALUATION FORM Site Name 0 NORTH VIEW NORTHEAST VIEW 126 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide NAVINI NETWORKS SITE EVALUATION FORM Site Name 0 EAST VIEW SOUTHEAST VIEW Comments Comments Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 127 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Comments Comments NAVINI NETWORKS SITE EVALUATION FORM Site Name 0 SOUTH VIEW SOUTHWEST VIEW 128 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Comments Comments NAVINI NETWORKS SITE EVALUATION FORM Site Name 0 WEST VIEW NORTHWEST VIEW Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 129 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Comments Comments NAVINI NETWORKS SITE EVALUATION FORM Site Name 0 EXISTING COMPOUND PICTURE GROUNDING 130 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide NAVINI NETWORKS SITE EVALUATION FORM Site Name 0 INGRESS EGRESS Comments Comments Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 131 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Comments Comments NAVINI NETWORKS SITE EVALUATION FORM Site Name 0 POWER TELCO 132 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Comments Comments NAVINI NETWORKS SITE EVALUATION FORM Site Name 0 SHELTER PICTURE SHELTER LAYOUT AND DIMENSION DRAWING Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 133 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. 134 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Appendix E: Interference Sweep Procedure Before You Start The instructions in this document assume the Field Engineer is at the Base Station site and that the BTS and RFS have not yet been installed. Required Equipment You will need the following equipment to perform the Interference Sweep:
?? HP4404B Spectrum Analyzer or equivalent. An equivalent analyzer must have the following:
- Screen Save abilities
- Max-hold function
- Peak search
- Ability to operate in the required frequency range
?? Omni or Directional Antenna for the given frequency range The directional antenna should have a gain of > 9 dBi.
?? Cavity Filter
?? LNA Module Pass band should cover the frequency range. It must have good out-of-band rejection so the LNA is not jammed by high power AMP, PCS, or TV signals. Gain > 21dB, NF < 7dB, for frequency range
?? Various SMA and N-Type adapters
?? Various RF cables to connect to Antenna and to test equipment Initial Configuration The set-up shown in Figure E1 and the information below are for the initial configuration. It gives you a starting point for this procedure. During the later steps, this configuration will change. Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 135 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Figure E1: Initial Configuration Figure 1: Initial Configuration Antenna DC Powered Cavity Filter LNA Module Spectrum Analyzer Step 1. Configure test equipment as shown in Figure E1. Step 2. Program the initial Spectrum Analyzer settings, per the following:
A. Resolution Bandwidth= 100KHz B. Video Bandwidth = 100KHz C. Attenuation = 0db D. Ref level = -10db E. Sweep time = auto F. Detector mode = positive peak G. Frequency = will be determined at each point during the procedure. Step 3. Set the frequency sweep range per the following. A. 2.4GHz = sweep for ranges 2.390GHz to 2.5GHz B. 2.6GHz = sweep for ranges 2.596GHz to 2.644GHz Interference Sweep Procedure The following information applies to both Panel and Omni antennas. It guides you through the steps to capture data required for the interference study. The number of steps varies depending on the type of antenna you are using and the frequency band you are investigating. If you are using an omni antenna to perform this procedure, only one pass is required. If a directional antenna is used, the number of passes through the procedure is determined by the beamwidth of the antenna. When using a directional antenna to pick up the interference, try to change the angle or downtilt to face a potential interference source such as a tower or a more populated area. A directional antenna is used to determine the location of the source that is generating the interference. The beamwidth of the directional antenna determines the number of directions that you need to sweep. For example, if the beamwidth of the directional antenna is 90 degrees, then four passes of the procedure are necessary. Whereas, an antenna with a 30-degree beamwidth requires 12 sets of 136 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide TEST TEST ANTENNA POSITION 1 sweeps to cover the same 360 degree area. The smaller beamwidth requires more sweeps but gives you greater accuracy in determining the source of the interfering signal. On each pass the directional antenna is moved per the beamwidth. Refer to Figure E2. With both types of antennas, try to determine the polarization of the interfering signals during each sweep. To do this, flip the antenna 90 degrees. All measurements that are captured are with the antenna in the vertical polarization position. The frequency band to be investigated is determined by the range of the BTS and RFS that is purchased by a customer. The 2.6GHz MMDS band is a licensed band, and the customer purchasing the equipment will have a license for a given 6MHz channel. The 2.4GHz band is an unlicensed frequency range that is open for many applications. The objective for the 2.4GHz sweeps is to find a 5MHz range that is the clearest of any interference. Figure E2: 90 Degree Directional Sweep The 2.6GHz sweeps are done to verify that there is not another carrier infringing on the given licensed channel. If you are performing the sweeps for a licensed 2.6GHz channel, it will greatly reduce the number of steps that you will need to perform. For a 2.6GHz system you only need to look at three channels for the spectrum. You will sweep the licensed channel as well as the channels above and below the licensed band. For example: If you have an E3 license (2.620GHz 2.626GHz), you will sweep E3 plus F2
(2.614GHz-2.620GHz) and F3 (2.626GHz 2.632GHz). ANTENNA POSITION 3 ANTENNA POSITION 2 ANTENNA POSITION 4 S E E R G E D DEGREES DEGREES D E G R E E S TEST TEST 0 9 9 0 90 90 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 137 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. You will only need the Max-hold portion of the procedure for 2.6GHz systems. Max-hold The Max-hold portion of the procedure is to be used for both unlicensed and licensed systems. Step 1. If using a directional antenna, check the direction of the antenna with a compass. Record the results. Step 2. Set the Start Frequency to 2.390GHz for a 2.4GHz system and to 2.595GHz for a 2.6GHz system. 2.6GHz system. capture. Step 3. Set the Stop Frequency to 2.5GHz for a 2.4GHz system and to 2.645GHz for a Step 4. Replace the antenna with a terminator to get a noise floor level. Save a screen capture. Step 5. Turn on the Max-hold feature and acquire the signal for two minutes. Save a screen Step 6. Run Single Sweep two times, saving the screen captures for both sweeps. This gives a reference for the worst case that is shown with the Max-hold in Step 5. Time can be saved on this step if the Spectrum Analyzer is equipped with a dual trace option. Turn Trace 2 on constant sweep and Trace 1 on Max-hold. After the Max-hold has acquired a signal for two minutes, press the single sweep. Save the screen capture. Refer to Figure E3, Max-hold Screen Capture. Step 7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 with the following Start and Stop frequencies. 2.4GHz Band Start Stop Channel E1 F1 E2 F2 E3 F3 E4 F4 2.6GHz Band Start 2.596GHz 2.602GHz 2.608GHz 2.614GHz 2.62GHz 2.626GHz 2.632GHz 2.638GHz Stop 2.602GHz 2.608GHz 2.614GHz 2.62GHz 2.626GHz 2.632GHz 2.638GHz 2.644GHz 2.45GHz 2.5GHz 2.41GHz 2.42GHz 2.43GHz 2.44GHz 2.45GHz 2.46GHz 2.47GHz 2.48GHz 2.49GHz 2.4GHz 2.45GHz 2.4GHz 2.41GHz 2.42GHz 2.43GHz 2.44GHz 2.45GHz 2.46GHz 2.47GHz 2.48GHz Figure E3: Max-hold Screen Capture 138 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Time Domain The Time Domain portion of the procedure is for unlicensed systems only. Step 1. Set the Center Frequency to 2.4025GHz. Set the Resolution Bandwidth to 5 MHz. Step 2. Set the Video Bandwidth to 1MHz. Step 3. Set the Sweep Time to 40 ms. Step 4. Set the Span to 0 Hz. Step 5. Replace the antenna with a terminator to get a noise floor level. Save a screen capture. Step 6. Set the display line to the noise floor level. The display line needs to stay on for all of the following sweeps. This display line is used for a reference point and should be set with the LNA powered on. Step 7. Run the Single Sweep approximately 50 times and determine how often the interference occurs. Save a screen capture of one worst case and one typical. See Figure E4, Time Domain Screen Capture. Step 8. Set the Sweep Time to 400 ms, and repeat Step 7. Step 9. Repeat Steps 7 and 8 for an offset of 5MHz up to 24875MHz for 2.4 systems. Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 139 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. 2.4GHz Band Center Frequency 2.4075GHz 2.4125GHz 2.4175GHz 2.4225GHz 2.4275GHz 2.4325GHz Up to 2.4875GHz Step 10. If a directional antenna is used, repeat the Max-hold and Time Domain steps for each direction. Figure E4: Time Domain Screen Capture 140 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Appendix F: Interference Sweep Tool Overview The Navini 2.4 GHz frequency Interference Sweep Test tool is used by an Installation &
Commissioning Technician or Field Engineer to sweep and collect data concerning RF conditions at a specific site. The location is typically a site that has been identified as a potentially good candidate for a Base Station installation. The test tool manages the RF sweep and interference level conditions, with post-analysis performed by RF Engineering personnel using simulation models. The results of the analysis are not a guarantee of optimal operating conditions for the Ripwave system. The objective is to identify and eliminate sites that might pose high potential problems in order to prioritize a given list of sites for Base Station deployment. Installation Equipment 1. Navini Survey Test Box 2. 12 pin Control Cable 3. Laptop Computer 4. Power Box With Attached Ethernet Cable 5. Power Cable for the Power Box Figure F1 is a block diagram showing the requirements to install the equipment. Figure F2 provides an example of the laptop and cable configuration. Figure F1: Block Diagram Laptop Computer Navini Test Box Ethernet Cable Control Cable AC outlet Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 141 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Figure F2: Laptop & Cable Configuration Mounting The Navini Test Box should be installed in the location where the RFS will be installed, or as close as possible. This will give the most accurate representation of the interference at the site. On the upper portion of the test box there are three labels indicating 0, 120, and 240 degrees (Figure F3). These are the antennas that are inside the test box. The label indicating 0 degrees should be pointed as close to north as possible. Connect the Control Cable from the Navini Test Box to the Control Box. The Control Box has a power connector, a circular control cable connector, and a blue Ethernet cable on it. The Ethernet cable will be connected to your laptop. Figure F3: Test & Control Box Setup Top down view of Top down view of Navini Test Box Navini Test Box 0 degrees 0 degrees 240 degrees 240 degrees 1 1 2 2 0 d 0 d e e gre gre e e s s Control Box Control Box 142 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Figure F4 shows a sample of the mounting requirements for the installation. Figure F4: Mounting Requirements Using the Site Survey Tool Recommended Settings 1. Interval Setting Provided by Navini Networks RF planning group 2. Frequency Selection 2.400 to 2.476 GHz approved ISM operating frequency 3. Number of Frames for Gain Adjustment Provided by Navini Networks RF planning group; site specific 4. Number of Stored Frames Provided by Navini Networks RF planning group; site specific Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 143 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Procedure Step 1. Open the application by selecting the Data Logger icon. Figure F5 shows the icon in the background. Figure F5: Data Logger Figure F6: Measurement Interval Step 2. Select the desired Ethernet adapter in the pop-up window. Step 3. Starting in the upper left corner of the program screen, set the date and time for the application to start its measurement interval. If the date and time set are earlier than the current time, logging will begin immediately. If the measurement needs to be repetitive, determine the interval between measurements by selecting the repeat box and entering the time interval (Figure F6). Step 4. 144 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Step 5. Select the frequencies to be measured. a. There are 3 frequency band selections. By default two are not available until selected by clicking on the white checkboxes to the right of each. b. If you select more than one band, it is best if you put in some delay between each bands measurements, as mentioned in Step 6 below. Step 6. If more than one frequency band has been selected, choose the delay to be used between each bands measurements. You can use the scroll bar or just type in the interval. Step 7. Select the number of frames for Gain Adjust. This allows the system to calculate the Modems receiver sensitivity. Step 8. Select the number of frames to be stored for analysis. The same number will be captured for each frequency band if more than one is selected. Step 9. Ensure antenna orientation is selected properly. It takes about 1 second to log one frame of data. Therefore:
Elapsed time = #antSelected ? [(number_of_gain_adj Frames) ? n + (Freq_Range/2) ?
#of_framesToLog + (Freq_Range/2) ? delayBetweenFreqs]
Where n is the number of gain adjustment loops. Up to 10 are possible if the received signal varies to a great extent in amplitude from frame to frame. Step 10. Select the Start button. Step 11. Enter in the desired Site Name in the pop-up window, and press Enter to start the measurements. Step 12. To stop the measurement, select the Abort button. Step 13. PC and Test operation should be validated every 3-4 hours for working order. To Verify the Data Step 1. Click the Verify Data button. The screen shown in Figure F7 appears. The last 50 data files logged can be viewed with this screen. Click on NEXT to view the next file. Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 145 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Figure F7: Verify Data Analysis of Data Not available on this release. FTP Instructions Step 1. Launch FTP Pro. Step 2. Select the file, Rfsweep. Step 3. The FTP Password is provided by Navini in a separate document. Step 4. To transfer the file, locate the Navinidatalog folder on the C drive of the laptop. Step 5. Select all files in the data folder via FTP browser, then, send the files. Step 6. Once the file transfer is complete, delete the data folder and rename the gain.adj file for the next test sequence. Create a new gain_adj folder under the NaviniDataLog folder. 146 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Appendix G: BTS Specifications Figure G1: Combo Chassis (Front) Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 147 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Figure G2: Combo Chassis (Back) 148 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Figure G3: Split Digital Chassis (Front) Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 149 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Figure G4: Split Digital Chassis (Back) 150 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Figure G5: Split RF Chassis (Front) Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 151 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Figure G6: Split RF Chassis (Back) 152 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Figure G7: TTA Digital Chassis (Front) Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 153 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Figure G8: TTA Digital Chassis (Back) 154 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Appendix H: RFS Data Sheets Figure H1: Panel Broadband Sectored Panel Antenna Navini RFS 22.9"
Panel RFS Antenna Pattern 0.00
-5.00
-10.00
-15.00
-20.00 53.4"
Vertical Horizontal Scale NAVINI PART NUMBER:
2.3GHz Low Band 2.3GHz Low Band w/o LNAs 2.3GHz High Band 2.3GHz High Band w/o LNAs 2.4GHz with LNAs 2.4GHz w/o LNAs 2.5GHz ABCD with LNAs 2.5GHz ABCD w/o LNAs 2.6GHz EFGH with LNAs 2.6GHz EFGH w/o LNAs 95-23000-00 95-23100-00 95-23000-05 95-23100-05 95-00043-05 95-10043-05 95-25000-00 95-25100-00 95-00005-05 95-10005-05 4.5 OD pipe sch 40 pipe 12.6"
5"
DESCRIPTION Frequency Range Polarization Antenna Gain Horizontal HPBW Vertical HPBW Connector Type's Lateral Thrust at 100 MPH (161 KM/HR) w/o ice Mounting Configurations Electrical Downtilt Mechanical Downtilt/Uptilt Weight Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 2.3GHz low band range = 2.305GHz Through 2.320GHz 2.3GHz high band = 2.345GHz through 2.360GHz 2.4GHz range = 2.4GHz through 2.473GHz 2.5GHz range = 2.500GHz through 2.596GHz 2.6GHz EFGH range = 2.596GHz through 2.686GHz Vertical 17-17.5 dBi for 120 Degree Sectored 130 Degrees 6 Degrees 9 Female "N" Type 1 - 12 Pin Female Circular 220 LB. Lateral Load To Pipe Mount - 2 3/4" TO 3" OD 6 Degrees 0 - 10 Degrees Mechanical 81 LB. Including Bracket Mount no pipe 54.5"
57.5"
GALVANIZED ANTENNA MOUNTING PIPE 2"
155 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Broadband Sectored Panel Antenna Navini RFS 22.9"
P a n e l R F S A n t e n n a P a t t e r n 0.00
-5.00
-10.00
-15.00
-20.00 53.4"
Vertical Horizontal Scale NAVINI PART NUMBER:
2.4GHz TTA RFS 95-00043-10 4.5 OD pipe sch 40 pipe 12.6"
5 "
DESCRIPTION Frequency Range 2.4GHz range = 2.4GHz through 2.483GHz GALVANIZED ANTENNA MOUNTING PIPE Polarization Antenna Gain Horizontal HPBW Vertical HPBW Connector Type's DC Power Dissipation Lateral Thrust at 100 MPH (161 KM/HR) w/o ice Mounting Configurations Electrical Downtilt Mechanical Downtilt/Uptilt Weight Figure H2: Panel TTA Vertical 17-17.5 dBi for 120 Degree Sectored 130 Degrees 6 Degrees 9 Female "N" Type 80 Watts 220 LB. Lateral Load To Pipe Mount - 2 3/4" TO 3" OD 6 Degrees 0 - 10 Degrees Mechanical 81 LB. Including Bracket Mount no pipe 54.5"
57.5"
2"
156 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Figure H3: Omni P/N 44-00038-01 Rev A v1.0 Feb.14, 2003 Broadband Omnidirectional Antenna Navini RFS Omni RFS Antenna Pattern 0.00
-5.00
-10.00
-15.00
-20.00 Vertical Horizontal Scale NAVINI PART NUMBERS:
note: * 02 or 12 are for degree of downtilt also available are 04 and 14
** xx is the degree of downtilt 02 or 04. 2.3GHz- low band with LNAs 2.3GHz- high band with LNAs 2.3GHz- low band without LNAs 2.3GHz- high band without LNAs 2.4GHz- with LNAs 2.4GHz- without LNAs 2.5GHz- with LNAs 2.5GHz- without LNAs 2.6GHz- EFGH with LNAs 2.6GHz- EFGH without LNAs 95-23008-02*
95-23008-12*
95-23108-02*
95-23108-12*
95-24008-xx**
95-24108-xx**
95-25008-xx**
95-25108-xx**
95-26008-xx**
95-26108-xx**
DESCRIPTION Frequency Range Polarization Antenna Gain Horizontal HPBW Vertical HPBW Connector Type's Lateral Thrust at 100 MPH (161 KM/HR) w/o ice Mounting Configurations Electrical Downtilt Mechanical Downtilt Weight 2.3GHz low band range = 2.305GHz Through 2.320GHz 2.3GHz high band = 2.345GHz through 2.360GHz 2.4GHz range = 2.4GHz through 2.473GHz 2.5GHz range = 2.500GHz through 2.596GHz 2.6GHz EFGH range = 2.596GHz through 2.686GHz Vertical 11.5dBi Omni 6 Degrees 9 Female "N" Type 1 - 12 Pin Female Circular 132 LB. Lateral Load To Pipe Mount 2 and 4 Degree N/A 73 lbs. Including mount 8.9"
13.057"
73.5"
3.0-4.5 OD PIPE FR 8.5"
R 11.7"
15.5"
Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 157 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Figure H4: Omni TTA Broadband Omnidirectional Antenna Navini RFS Omni RFS Antenna Pattern 0.00
-5.00
-10.00
-15.00
-20.00 Vertical Horizontal Scale NAVINI PART NUMBERS:
2.4GHz TTA RFS, 2 degree downtilt 95-24018-02 8.9"
DESCRIPTION Frequency Range 2.4GHz range = 2.4GHz through 2.483GHz 73.5"
13.057"
Polarization Antenna Gain Horizontal HPBW Vertical HPBW Connector Type's DC Power Dissipation Lateral Thrust at 100 MPH (161 KM/HR) w/o ice Mounting Configurations Electrical Downtilt Mechanical Downtilt Weight Vertical 11.5dBi Omni 6 Degrees 9 Female "N" Type 80 Watts 132 LB. Lateral Load To Pipe Mount 2 and 4 Degree N/A 73 lbs. Including mount 3.0-4.5 OD PIPE FR 8.5"
R 11.7"
15.5"
158 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Appendix I: BTS Outdoor Enclosure Manufacturers General Navini Networks does not manufacture external cabinets for the Ripwave BTS. The following lists two manufacturers who are positioned to provide external cabinets for the Navini system. Inclusion of the manufacturers on this list does not represent an endorsement of the manufacturer or its products by Navini Networks. Manufacturers List Purcell Systems 22924 E. Appleway Avenue Liberty Lake, WA 99019 509 755-0341 Steve Busby Http://www.purcellsystems.com/
Hendry Telephone Products 55 Castillan Drive Santa Barbara, CA 93117 805 571-8287 Phil Skeen Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 159 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. 160 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Appendix J: Rectifier/BBU Suppliers General This section includes contact information for two rectifier/BBU suppliers. Inclusion of a supplier on this list does not represent an endorsement of the supplier or its products. Suppliers List Valere Power Systems 651 N. Plano Road, Suite 421 Richardson, TX 75081 469 330-9100 Matt McManus Argus DC Power Argus Regional Sales Manager Addison, IL 630 530-5006 Richard Meyer http://www.argusdcpower.com/
Regulatory Reference Chapter 1, Page 8 Regulatory Information requirements. Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 161 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. 162 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide ROD ANTENNA BTS Opt 1 OPTION 5 OPTION 4 OPTION 3 GROUND BAR LIGHTNING RF CABLES PANEL LOCATION PANEL ANTENNA BRACKET Indoor PSX-ME SURGE PROTECTOR CABLE RUN / INTERNAL RUN CABLE RUN / CABLE LADDER NAVINI NETWORKS BASE STATION LAYOUT WATER TOWER OPTION PANEL ANTENNA Appendix K: Sample Base Station Drawing Figure K1: Sample Base Station Drawing SHELTER / HUT CABLE OPTION 1 ENTRY INDOOR BTS OVERHEAD CABLE LADDER CABLE LADDER 24VDC
@ 60A ETHERNET
/ TELCO CABINET GND PANEL LOCATION PANEL Indoor 24VDC
@ 60A ETHERNET
/ TELCO CABINET GND PSX GROUND BAR NAVINI BTS GROUND BAR NAVINI BTS PSX-ME SURGE PROTECTOR OPTION 2 INDOOR BTS CORE TO INSIDE RF CABLES GROUND BAR OF TOWER OPTION 6 ANTENNA BTS Opt 2 PSX GPS Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 163 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. NOTE 1.CABLE BUNDLE CONSIST OF 9 RF CABLES AND 1 POWER/DATA CABLE 2.RF CABLE TYPE TO BE DETERMINED BASED ON RUN LENGTH AND DB LOSS/FT 3.CABLE HANGERS TO BE SPECIFIED/RECOMMENDED BY TOWER CREW 4.ANTENNA BRACKET TO BE SUPPLIED BY CUSTOMER AS RECOMMENDED BY TOWER CREW 5.BTS REQUIRES 24VDC @ 60A. 6.PSX-ME SURGE PROTECTORS TO BE INSTALLED IN-LINE BETWEEN RF CABLE AND ANTENNA 7.PSX SURGE PROTECTOR TO BE MOUNTED ON GROUND BAR CLOSE TO BTS CABINET/CHASSIS 8.ETHERNET/TELCO BACKHAUL TO BE PROVIDED BY CUSTOMER 9.ALL INSTALLED EQUIPMENT/MATERIALS MUST BE PROPERLY GROUNDED 10.OPTION 1 IS FOR AN INDOOR BTS INSTALL, OPTION 2 IS FOR OUTDOOR BTS CUSTOMER SITE NAME LOCATION 1 PANEL LOCATION OPTION 5=DOME TOP 6=SIDE 2 ANTENNA BRACKET TYPE 3 PSX-ME SURGE PROTECTOR 4 ANTENNA AZIMUTH 5 ANTENNA HEIGHT 6 7 8 ANTENNA DOWNTILT TOWER JUMPER LENGTH TOWER JUMPER CABLE TYPE 9 MAIN FEEDER TYPE 10 MAIN FEEDER LENGTH 11 GROUND BUSS BAR 12 CABLE HANGER TYPE 13 WEATHERPROOFING KIT 14 GROUNDING CABLE LENGTH 15 GROUNDING KIT 16 HOISTING GRIP 17 GPS MOUNT 18 GPS CABLE LENGTH 19 GPS CABLE TYPE 20 LOCATION OPTION 1=SHELTER 2=INSIDE TOWER 21 CABLE RUN OPTION 3=EXTERNAL 4=INTERNAL 22 JUMPER CABLE LENGTH 23 JUMPER CABLE TYPE 24 PSX SURGE PROTECTOR 25 GPS SURGE PROTECTOR 26 ALT GROUND BUSS BAR 27 24VDC/60A POWER SUPPLY 28 INDOOR RACK/CABINET PCS DEGREES FEET FEET PCS PCS FEET PCS PCS FEET FEET PCS PCS PCS 164 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Appendix L: Antenna Power & Cable Selection Overview This section provides formulas and data that are necessary inputs for determining the right cable to be measured, cut, and installed. There are 3 types of cables that are part of the Base Station installation: antenna cables, calibration (cal) cable, and data/power cable. The antenna cables are the eight cables that carry amplified RF signals. They run between the RF/PA cards and the 8 antenna elements. The calibration (cal) cable is a single RF coaxial cable that provides an RF feedback path for calibrating the system. It runs between the backplane of the digital shelf and the RFS. The data/power cable may or may not be a separate cable from the cal cable. It is possible to use different types of cable with different loss factors for the antenna cables and cal cable. The formulas presented in this section call for either an antenna cable loss or a cal cable loss. Most applications deploy the same cable type for both the antenna and cal cables. To determine the type of cable and acceptable loss of that cable for a site, the operating transmit and receive range must be known. This is commonly referred to as the maximum transmit output power and the receiver sensitivity range. The operating transmit power and receive range should have been identified during the site survey, or they may be based on regulatory compliance. Determining the cable type and acceptable loss for a site are typically driven by two goals: (1) Which is the least expensive cable; and (2) Which has the higher (normally) loss. Whether or not the goals are achieved is determined by the output power. For example, the maximum transmit output power for a 2.6 Base Station might be given as +30dBm, or 1 Watt, to the antenna. An example of receiver sensitivity for a 2.6 system would be given as 80 to 90 dBm. In addition to cable power loss, other types of loss have to be factored - for example, the calibration board. The calibration board is part of the RFS that samples the energy being transmitted from or received by the 8 antenna elements and combines that energy which is used when performing a calibration on the Base Station. This loss, plus cable loss and other types of loss in the equipment are called out in the following procedure. Procedure Read and follow the 7 steps/formulas below, in the order shown, to determine the resulting PA/RFS output power and desired transmit and receive calibration range for the type of Base Station you will be installing. Refer to Tables L1 and L2 to complete the steps. Table L1 provides Base Station operating parameters based on system type (2.3, 2.4, etc.), as well as other variables. Table L2 provides cable attenuation data. Before you begin, read through the steps/formulas, notes, and Table L1 in detail. Refer to the column letters at the top of Table L1 to locate the appropriate values requested in some of the formulas. Note that step/formula 1 contains a sub-procedure for determining antenna cable loss using Table L2. Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 165 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Step/Formula 1 Determine the maximum capable BTS output power to the antenna.
= [(PA Output to Meet FCC) or (to Meet SNR)] BTS Loss RFS Loss BTS Antenna Cable Loss*
[Column A or B]1 [Column E]2 [Column F or G] [Calculated* or Measured]
?? BTS Antenna Cable loss < 18 dB for ACTIVE RFS configurations
?? BTS Antenna Cable loss < 8 dB for PASSIVE RFS configurations Change the EMS settings accordingly. Antenna Cable Selection
*Sub-procedure: Calculate BTS antenna cable loss, referring to Table 8.
= [[Distance (length in ft) 100 ft] x Attenuation value/cable type] + 0.6 for 6 connectors/3 cables
. Step/Formula 2 Determine the maximum BTS output power that can be calibrated.
= Max Synth Input + Cal Cable Loss + Min Cal Board Loss3 + Backplane Loss4
[Column K] + [Calculated or Measured] + [Note 3] + [Default of 5.0 in EMS or Measured]
Step/Formula 3 Determine the actual** max BTS output power available to the antenna.
= The lesser of the two values of Step/Formula 1 and Step/Formula 2 (aka, the floor)
** Actual is what you can calibrate the BTS at. Step/Formula 4 Determine the minimum BTS output power that can be calibrated .
= Min Synth Input + Cal Cable Loss + Max Cal Board Loss3 + Backplane Loss4
[Column J] + [Calculated or Measured] + [Note 3] + [Default of 5.0 in EMS or Measured]
Determine the actual** maximum EIRP. Step/Formula 5 Cal Cable Selection
= Step/Formula 3 + Antenna Gain. The antenna gain is affected by the type of antenna (omni, panel, 2.3, 2.4, etc.) and refers to the values in the RFS Configuration Script that accompanied the antenna from Manufacturing.
**Actual is what you can calibrate the BTS at. Step/Formula 6 Determine the minimum BTS RX input power that can be calibrated.
= Min Synth Output - Cal Cable Loss - Min Cal Board Loss3 - Backplane Loss4
[Column H] - [Calculated or Measured] - [Note 3] - [Default of 5.0 in EMS or Measured]
Determine the maximum BTS RX input power that can be calibrated. Step/Formula 7
= Max Synth Output - Cal Cable Loss -Max Cal Board Loss3 - Backplane Loss4
[Column I] - [Calculated or Measured] - [Note 3] - [Default of 5.0 in EMS or Measured]
166 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide NOTES 1This note pertains to Step/Formula 1: For PA_Output_Powe r, if in the U.S. use Column A. If outside the U.S., as a precaution contact Navini Technical Support (Engineering) for sign-off. The value input cannot be more than the value shown in Column B. 2This note pertains to Step/Formula 1: BTS_Loss is either (a) loss with a filter - i.e., if operating in the U.S. or other market that requires a filter, or (b) loss with a bypass cable. The first number (+1) is the correct value if a standard filter is used. The second number (0.4) is the correct value if a bypass cable is used. In Column D, for a 2.3 GHz system the values are the same for both the 8-carrier and the 10-carrier systems. 3Min loss in Cal Board is 27 dB. Max loss in Cal Board is 31 dB. 4In the EMS the backplane loss will show 5.0 as default. Actual measured loss will be indicated on the back of the chassis. Table 7: Transmitter Operating Parameters A B C PA Max Output Power to Meet FCC Limits
(dBm) PA Max Output Power
(dBm) PA Min Output Power Before Damage Level or Auto Shutdown*
(dBm) D Max Antenna Terminal Power to Meet FCC Limits
(dBm) E F G H I J K BTS Loss With Standard Filter /
Bypass Cable**
(dB) Active RFS Loss Type
(dB) Passive RFS Loss Type**
* (dB) Synth Min Outpu t
(dBm) Synth Max Output
(dBm) Synth Min Input
(dBm) Synth Max Input
(dBm)
+38
+40
+42
+30
+38
+40
+42
+30
+30 2.3
(10 carrier)
+37
+40
+42 2.4 (combo)
+37
+37
+42
+17.5 2.5
+39
+41
+42 2.6
(EFGH Split)
+39
+41
+42 Limited by Cable Loss Limited by Cable Loss 2.6
(EF Combo)
+37
+41
+42 Limited by Cable Loss 1 / 0.4 Block Filter has 1.0 dB max insertion loss 1 / 0.4 Block Filter has 1.0 dB max insertion loss 1 / 0.4 Block Filter has 1.0 dB max insertion loss 0.4 Bypass 1.0 / 0.4 Channel Filter has 1.0 +/- 0.2 dB insertion loss 1.0 / 0.4 Channel Filter has 1.0 +/- 0.2 dB insertion loss 1.8 / 0.4 Channel Filter has 1.8 +/- 0.2 dB including cable to backplane 3.2 1.7
-60
-32
-23
+0 3.2 1.7
-60
-32
-23
+0 3.2 1.7
-60
-32
-23
+0 3.2 1.7
-50
-20
-35
-10 3.2 1.7
-60
-32
-23
+0 3.2 1.7
-60
-32
-23
+0 3.2 1.7
-60
-30
-20
+0
* The lowest value at which 2.3, 2.5, and 2.6 EFGH PAs will shut down automatically. There is no auto shutdown for 2.4 and 2.6 EF combo systems.
** The value at which the bypass does not meet FCC limits.
***Passive configurations of BTS affect system Noise figure. For passive systems other than 2.4, consult SYSTEMS ENGINEERING. 2.3
(6 carrier) 2.3
(8 carrier) Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 167 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Table L2: Cable Attenuation in dB per 100 Feet Cable Type 2 ?
LDF 12-50 1 5/8?
LDF 7-
50A LMR 1700 1 ?
LDF 6-
50A LMR 1200 7/8?
LDF 5-
50A LMR 900 5/8?
LDF 4.5-
50A
LDF 4-
50A LMR 600 Frequency/Size 2.350 1.980 1.670 1.550 1.200 1.090 0.870 0.865 0.630 0.590
Super flex FSJ 4-
50B 0.520 LMR 500 3/8?
LDF 2-
50A LMR 400 0.500 0.440 0.405 2000 MHz 2400 MHz 2500 MHz 2600 MHz N/A N/A N/A 0.994 1.11 1.5 1.7 1.42 1.99 1.82 2.64 2.27 3.25 1.5 2.2 2.02 2.9 2.52 3.63 3.9 4.3 5.09 4.84 5.17 6 5.67 5.4 5.67 6.6 1.71 1.53 2.26 2.07 3 2.58 3.70 4.42 5.8 5.48 5.79 6.8 1.24 1.27 1.3 1.8 1.57 2.3 2.12 3.1 2.64 3.78 4.5 5.94 Weight lbs/ft 1.22 0.82 0.74 0.63 0.45 0.33 0.27 0.15 0.15 0.13 0.14 Bend Radius (inches) 24 20 13.5 15 6.5 10 3 8 5 1.5 3 1.25 3.75 1 5.6 0.1 5.91 6.9 0.08 0.07 Table L3: 2.4 GHz TTA BTA Max Power and Frequency Range Supported Frequency Range Supported US ETSI Omni Sector Omni Sector Max Power 17.5 dBm 16 dBm 24 dBm 18 dBm 2.400 to 2.483 GHz Table L4: 2.4 GHz TTA BTA Cable Loss and Corresponding Cable Length Calculated Cable Loss Length of RG6 Bundled Cable Engineering Notes Min 5 dB 40 ft (12 m) Max(1) Min Max(2) Min Max(1) 20 dB 5 dB 20 dB 5 dB 20 dB 180 ft (55 m) 40 ft (12 m) 180 ft (55 m) 40 ft (12 m) 180 ft (55 m) For a cable loss of more than 15 dB, Adjacent Channel Power degradation will occur. At 20 dB of cable loss a minimum ACP degradation of 3dB will occur For a cable loss of more than 15 dB, Adjacent Channel Power degradation will be dominated by RFC. At 20 dB of cable loss RFC SNR will be approaching 30 dB US
(Omni & Sector) Omni Sector ETSI 168 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Table L5: 3.5 GHz TTA BTA Max Power and Frequency Range Supported Max Power Frequency Range Supported ETSI
(Omni & Sector) 30 dBm 3.410 to 3.700 GHz Table L6: 3.5 GHz TTA BTA Cable Loss and Corresponding Cable Length Calculated Length of RG6 Bundled Cable Calculated Length of RG11 Bundled Cable Cable Loss 5 dB Min 35 ft (11 m) 53 ft (16 m) Max(1) 30 dB 225 ft (68 m) 340 ft (104 m) ETSI
(Omni & Sector) Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 169 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. 170 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Appendix M: Sample Bill of Materials (BoM) 1/13/2003 1:58:54 PM BOM EXPLOSION REPORT KIT, INSTALLATION, BTS, 2.6 Revision B Part Number: 95-05001-00 Part 13-00034-00 : CONN, COAX, CRIMP, N STRAIGHT PLUG, EZ PIN (LMR600) . Quantity: 36 Part 13-00194-00 A CONN, COAX, CRIMP, N STRAIGHT PLUG, EZ PIN, MALE (LMR400). Quantity: 8 Part Connectors, NType 13-00218-00 A CONN, LUG, ONE-HOLE #6. Quantity: 10 Connectors 13-00219-00 : CONN, LUG, TWO-HOLE #6. Quantity: 10 Connectors 13-00220-00 : CONN, LUG, TWO-HOLE #2. Quantity: 10 Part 18-00001-00 : CABLE, COAX, OUTDOOR RF, LMR600. Quantity: 1350 Part 18-00035-00 A WIRE, GROUND, GREEN, STRANDED, #2. Quantity: 50 Part 18-00036-00 : CABLE, COAX, OUTDOOR RF, LMR400. Quantity: 200 Cables, Coax 18-00049-00 : WIRE, STRANDED, GREEN, #6 AWG 50. Quantity: 13 Part 24-00045-00 : NUT, REG. HEX, CRES, 1/4-20UNC. Quantity: 8 Part 24-00117-00 : BUSS BAR, GROUND, TOWER, 1/4IN X 2-1/2IN X 12-1/2IN. Quantity: 1 Part 24-00118-00 : BUSS BAR, GROUND, SHELTER, 1/4IN X 4IN, DRILLED TO 5/8IN. Quantity: 1 Part 24-00119-00 : GRIP, HOISTING, PRE-LACED, FOR 1/2IN COAX CABLE. Quantity: 10 Part 24-00120-00 : HANGERS, ASSY, CUSHION, 5H, 1/2IN CORREGATED COAX. Quantity: 4 Mechanical Hardware 24-00121-00 : MOUNT, HANGER, CROSS CUSHION, KIT OF 5. Quantity: 2 Part 24-00122-00 : BLOCK, SUPPORT, MINI COAX. Quantity: 2 Part 24-00134-00 A BREAKER, OUTPUT DISTRIBUTION, 60 AMP, BTS INSTALLATION. Quantity: 1 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 171 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Mechanical Hardware 24-00156-00 : CLAMP, PIPE TO PIPE, KIT OF 2. Quantity: 1 Mechanical Hardware 24-00170-00 : NUT, REG. HEX, CRES, #10-24. Quantity: 3 Part 24-00171-00 : WASH, STAR, #10. Quantity: 3 Part 24-00172-00 : WASH, STAR, . Quantity: 16 Part 24-00250-10 : BOLT, HEX, 1/4-20 X 1.000 LG, SSPA. Quantity: 8 Mechanical Hardware 24-06156-43 : WASH, FLAT, CRES, #6 T-B-REGULAR, .156 X .438 X .040. Quantity: 16 Part 24-06250-14 : WASH, LOCK, SPLIT, CRES 1/4, Reg, .252X.487X.062. Quantity: 16 Part 32-00031-00 : ARRESTOR, LIGHTNING, RF 1.2 - 2.8GHz, N TYPE FEMALE, DC BLOCK, PSX. Quantity: 9 Part 32-00033-00 : ARRESTOR, LIGHTNING, GPS, PICKOR, DC PASS, MM50MNZ+6. Quantity: 2 Part 32-00052-00 : KIT, GROUNDING, LMR-600, 5FT X 1/2 IN, 2 HOLE LUG. Quantity: 9 Part 32-00053-00 : KIT, GROUNDING, LMR-400, 5FT X 3/8 IN, 2 HOLE LUG. Quantity: 2 Part 32-00077-00 : KIT, WEATHERPROOFING, GEL WRAP. Quantity: 1 Part 32-11004-00 : ARRESTOR, SURGE, EMP, DC BLOCK, RF COAX, In-line 2.4 GHz., PSX-ME. Quantity: 9 Part 92-00006-00 : SUBASSY, MOUNT UNIVERSAL FOR OMNI ANTENNA. Quantity: 1 Antennas 68-00006-00 : DWG, ASSY MOUNT UNIVERSAL FOR OMNI ANTENNA. Quantity: REF Assembly Drawing, Mechanical 55-00063-00 : BASE, WELDMENT, ANTENNA MOUNT, OMNI. Quantity: 1 Part 55-00079-00 : FLANGE C, ANTENNA MOUNT, OMNI. Quantity: 1 Part 55-00080-00 : GUSSET, ANTENNA MOUNT, OMNI . Quantity: 2 Part 55-00081-00 : PLATE, BASE, ANTENNA MOUNT, OMNI. Quantity: 1 Part 24-10000-00 : NUT, PEM, BLIND .250 1/4-20 BS-0420-2. Quantity: 8 Part Type 55-00088-00 : FLANGE, CLAMP, STANDARD MOUNT, GALVANIZED. Quantity: 2 Part 24-09000-00 : STUD, 7/16 X 14 LG ALL THREAD, GALVANIZED, ANTENNA MOUNT, OMNI. Quantity: 4 172 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Mechanical Hardware 24-09001-00 : WASHER, SQ, ALUMINUM, ANTENNA MOUNT. Quantity: 4 Mechanical Hardware 24-09002-00 : WASHER, SQ, GALVANIZED, ANTENNA MOUNT. Quantity: 4 Mechanical Hardware 24-09003-00 : FLAT WASHER 7/16 REG GALVANIZED. Quantity: 12 Mechanical Hardware 24-09005-00 : LOCK WASHER, 7/16, GALVANIZED. Quantity: 12 Mechanical Hardware 24-09004-00 : HEX NUT 7/16 GALVANIZED. Quantity: 12 Mechanical Hardware 24-00124-00 : BOLT, HEX 1/4-20 X 1.250 LG SSPA. Quantity: 8 Part Type 24-06250-14 : WASH, LOCK, SPLIT, CRES 1/4, Reg, .252X.487X.062. Quantity: 8 Part 24-06250-28 : WASH, FLAT, CRES, 1/4 T-B-REGULAR, .281 X .734 X .063. Quantity: 8 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 173 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. 174 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Appendix N: Install Connectors on Cables Reference Chapter 1, Page 8 Regulatory Information requirements. The following article, written by Lou Caruso of Times Microwave Systems, appears in Volume 8 Issue 5, 2000 of Telecom Exchange. Among the keys to success in any wireless system are the quality and reliability of the connector installations on the coaxial cable transmission lines. And it naturally follows that the more difficult the connectors are to install, the lower the likelihood that they will be installed correctly thus adversely affecting the quality and reliability of the entire system. Traditional connectors require the pin contact to be soldered to the center conductor of the coax cable. Unfortunately, when RF transmission lines are installed outdoors as is often the case, weather conditions may not be conducive to using soldering equipment. Wind, rain and snow all can make soldering difficult if not impossible. If electrical power isnt available, gas or butane fired soldering equipment may be the only recourse and these devices typically do not generate as much heat as electrically powered devices. Consequently, they may not do as good of a job. The physical handling of the cable, connector pin, butane torch and solder can also be tricky (not enough hands!), especially if theres only one person doing the installation. For indoor installations, such as distributed antenna systems in buildings, the installer may be working in cramped spaces, on a ladder and in low-light conditions. How can these issues be overcome to ensure a reliable connector installation and proper system performance?
Simplicity is the key. The connector installation process can be simplified with the use of non-solder connectors and the correct installation tools. We have designed non-solder connectors to work with our LMR? low-loss flexible 50-Ohm coaxial cables. These connectors may be installed under all field installation conditions, because they use either silver or gold plated copper-beryllium spring finger contacts that make positive contact with the center conductor and do not require soldering. Small cable sizes, LMR-400 (3/8) and LMR-600 (1/2), require a crimp-style contact attachment ring. When the cable is larger, the LMR-900-DB (5/8) for example, a larger clamp method of attachment is needed. Interfaces available include 7-16DIN, N, TNC and reverse polarity TNC connectors. Even though using non-solder connectors is simpler, there are still certain techniques that must be used if a proper connection is to be achieved. Additionally, you must use the proper tools to get the job done, including stripping, prepping and deburring instruments. Poorly installed connectors are the most common cause of voltage standing wave ratio problems. Likewise, a good connection will achieve the best RF transmission performance with a minimum of signal loss. The following techniques will ensure a good connection and long-term reliability. Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 175 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. The typical procedure for installing the connector on cable sizes LMR-400 and LMR-600 (also is the same procedure on DB and FR) is:
?? Flush cut the cable squarely.
?? Slide the heat shrink boot and crimp ring onto the cable. Strip the cable-end using the ST-400-EZ or ST-600-EZ prep/strip tool by inserting the cable into End 1 and rotating the tool. Remove any residual dielectric material from the center conductor.
?? Insert the cable into End 2 of the tool and rotate the tool to remove the plastic jacket.
?? Deburr the center conductor using the DBT-01 deburring tool.
?? Flare the braid slightly and push the connector body onto the cable until the connector snaps into place, then slide the crimp ring forward, creasing the braid.
?? Temporarily slide the crimp ring back, and remove the connector body from the cable to trim the excess braid at the crease line, then remount the connector and slide the crimp ring forward until it butts up against the connector body.
?? Position the heavy duty HX-4 crimp tool with the appropriate dies (CT-400/300 tool may be used on LMR-400) directly behind and adjacent to the connector body, and crimp the connector. The HX-4 crimp tool automatically releases when the crimp is complete.
?? Position the heat shrink boot as far forward on the connector body as possible, without interfering with the coupling nut and use a heat gun to form a weather tight seal. The procedure for installing the connector on cable sizes LMR-400-LLPL and LMR-600-LLPL is very similar with a couple of differences:
?? Flush cut the cable squarely.
?? Slide the heat shrink boot and crimp ring onto the cable. Strip the cable-end using the ST-400-EZ or ST-600-EZ prep/strip tool by inserting the cable into End 1 and rotating the tool. Remove any residual dielectric material from the center conductor.
?? Insert the cable into End 2 of the tool and rotate the tool to remove the plastic jacket.
?? Deburr the center conductor using the DBT-01 deburring tool.
?? Flare the braid slightly, then put a slight taper on the front edge of the aluminum-covered dielectric by rolling your fingers around the stripped end. (The heat shrink boot can also be used rather than your fingers.)
?? Rotate (turn) and push the connector body with a screwing motion (to prevent the foil from pushing back) onto the cable until the connector snaps into place. Then slide the crimp ring forward creasing the braid.
?? Temporarily slide the crimp ring back, and remove the connector body from the cable to trim the excess braid at the crease line, then remount the connector and slide the crimp ring forward until it butts up against the connector body.
?? Position the heavy duty HX-4 crimp tool with the appropriate dies (CT-400/300 tool may be used on LMR-400-LLPL) directly behind and adjacent to the connector body, and crimp the connector. The HX-4 crimp tool automatically releases when the crimp is complete.
?? Position the heat shrink boot as far forward on the connector body as possible, without interfering with the coupling nut and use a heat gun to form a weather tight seal. 176 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide For installing the EZ connectors on LMR-900-DB, FR and LLPL cables and larger, the process is as follows:
?? Flush cut the cable squarely.
?? Slide the backnut and gasket onto the cable.
?? Strip the cable-end using the EZ prep/strip tool by inserting the cable into the proper end of the tool (note that only one strip is needed).
?? Slide the gland washer on the end of the cable and over the braid (being careful not to disturb the braid) until it rests on the end of the cable jacket.
?? Spread the braid over the gland washer.
?? Slide the collar over the foil.
?? Push the spring finger end of the connector pin assembly into the hollow center conductor.
?? Bring up the backnut and gasket.
?? Screw the connector head onto the backnut and tighten with proper size wrenches until the gasket is almost fully compressed. Table N1: Reference Chart Showing EZ Connectors For Use with LMR, DB & FR Cables LMR? FR DB 400 Coupling Nut Hex Outer Contact Crimp Description N Male Interface N Female N Female TNC Male Straight Plug Straight Jack Bulkhead Jack Straight Plug N Male TNC Female UHF Male TNC Male Reverse Polarity Reverse Polarity Straight Plug Straight Plug Right Angle Straight Jack Bulkhead Jack Straight Plug TNC Male N Female N Female N Male TNC Male Reverse Polarity Reverse TNC Part Number EZ-400-
NMH EZ-400-NF NA Knurl Knurl Knurl NA EZ-400-
NF-Bh EZ-400-
TM EZ-400-
TM-RP EZ-400-
TM-RP EZ-400-
UM EZ-600-
NMH EZ-600-
NMH-RA EZ-600-NF NA Hex Hex Knurl EZ-600-
NF-BH EZ-600-
TM EZ-600-
TM-RP EZ-600-
NA Knurl Knurl NA Inner Contact Spring Finger Spring Finger Spring Finger Spring Finger Spring Finger Spring Finger Spring Finger Spring Finger Spring Finger Spring Finger Spring Finger Spring Finger Spring Finger Spring Crimp Crimp Crimp Crimp Crimp Crimp Crimp Crimp Crimp Crimp Crimp Crimp Crimp 400 400 400 400 400 400 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 177 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Interface Description LMR? FR DB 600 600 900 900 900 900 900 900 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1700 1700 1700 1700 Female UHF Male 716 DIN Male N Male N Female 716 DIN Male 716 DIN Male 716 DIN Female 7/8 EIA N Male N Female 716 DIN Male 716 DIN Female 7/8 EIA N Male N Female 716 DIN Male 716 DIN Female 600 900 N Male N Male Polarity Straight Plug Straight Plug Straight Plug Straight Jack Straight Plug Right Angle Straight Jack Straight Plug Straight Plug Straight Jack Straight Plug Straight Jack Straight Plug Straight Plug Straight Jack Straight Plug Straight Jack Straight Plug Straight Plug Straight Part Number TM-RP EZ-600-
UM EZ-600-
716-MH EZ-900-
NMC EZ-900-
NFC EZ-900-
716MC EZ-900-
716-MCRA EZ-900-
716-FC EZ-900-
78EIA EZ-1200-
NMC EZ-1200-
NFC EZ-1200-
716MC EZ-1200-
716-FC EZ-1200-
78EIA EZ-1700-
NMC EZ-1700-
NFC EZ-1700-
716MC EZ-1700-
716-FC Part Number EZ-400-
NMH-PL EZ-600-
NMH-PL EZ-900-
Coupling Nut Knurl Hex Hex NA Hex Hex NA NA Hex NA Hex NA NA Hex NA Hex NA Inner Contact Finger Spring Finger Spring Finger Press Fit Outer Contact Crimp Crimp Clamp Press Fit Clamp Press Fit Clamp Press Fit Clamp Press Fit Clamp Press Fit Clamp Press Fit Clamp Press Fit Clamp Press Fit Clamp Press Fit Clamp Press Fit Clamp Press Fit Clamp Press Fit Clamp Press Fit Clamp Press Fit Clamp Inner Contact Spring Finger Spring Finger Press Fit Crimp Clamp Hex Hex Table N2: Reference Chart Showing EZ Connectors For Use with LMR LLPL Cables Outer LLPL Contact Crimp Coupling Nut Hex Description N Male Interface 400 178 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide LLPL Interface Description 900 1200 1200 N Female N Male N Female Plug Straight Jack Straight Plug Straight Jack Part Number NMC-PL EZ-900-
NFC-PL EZ-1200-
NMC-PL EZ-1200-
NFC-PL Coupling Nut Inner Contact Outer Contact NA Hex NA Press Fit Clamp Press Fit Clamp Press Fit Clamp Table N3: Reference Chart Showing the Proper Tools for Use with EZ Connectors LMR?
LMR? -FR LMR? -DB LMR? -LLPL 400 (3/8) EZ Connector Type ST-400EZ DBT-01 Strip/Prep Tool Crimp Handle Deburr Tool Crimp Dies Crimp N/A Wrenches HX-4 CT-
400/300 Hex-4 N/A Y1719 Included w/Handle Y1720 N/A N/A WR-900 WR-900 WR-1200A WR-
1200B WR-1700 WR-1700 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Clamp Clamp Crimp Clamp ST-600EZ DBT-01 ST-
900/1200C ST-
900/1200C ST-1700C N/A 600 (1/2) 900-DB
(5/8) 1200-DB
(7/8) 1700-DB
(1-1/4) All outdoor installations should be weatherproofed with either a standard weatherproofing kit such as the Times WK-2 kit or a cold shrink kit, also available from Times. Times LMR? coax cables are low loss, flexible and non-kinking, unlike corrugated coax cables, which are much less flexible and prone to kinking. Times Microwave Systems offers a complete range of LMR? cables to suit every possible type of installation and need:
?? LMR? Low loss coax, flexible and non-kinking; suitable for general outdoor use such as jumpers, rooftops and short tower runs.
?? LMR? DB Watertight outdoor cable; designed for tower feeder runs, jumpers and rooftops applications; uses the same connectors as LMR? cable.
?? LMR? FR Riser rated (UL/CSA listed); fire retardant; employs a low smoke non-halogen polyolefin jacket; for use in vertical riser/access shafts unoccupied building spaces or anywhere that fire retardance is needed; uses the same connectors as LMR? cable.
?? LMR? LLPL Plenum rated (UL/CSA listed); for in-building runs; can be used in open air handling spaces such as above drop ceilings and air plenums; flame retardant and low smoke generating design; uses special EZ connectors. Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 179 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. 180 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003
1 | Appendix 2 | Users Manual | 3.31 MiB | October 12 2003 |
Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Appendix O: RFS System Test (Cable Sweeps) Introduction Before installing the Base Station at a site, the RFS and the associated cables must be tested, and the results of the tests documented. This procedure applies to the full RFS sub-assembly and associated cables: data/power cable, RF cables, and the RFS unit. All results are recorded in the RFS System Test Form P/N 40-00093-00. Procedures Combo & Split Chassis Base Stations RFS Data/Power Cable (Combo and Split BTS Configurations Only) This test will check the integrity of the data/power cable. The cable being tested consists of six twisted pairs of conductors. The conductors will be tested for continuity, opens, and shorts. Male connectors are on both ends of the cable. Each connector is wired the same. You will need to check all cables the main cable from the RFS to the data/power cable surge protector, and the jumper cable from the data/power cable surge protector to the BTS. The pin layout is shown in Figure O1, looking at the connector face. Table O1 provides the pin layout details. Figure O1: Pin Layout G M D H C E K A B F L J Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 181 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. RED PAIR PAIR Circular Wire Color Signal Name Connector(s) A B C D E F G H J K L M POWER CABLE PIN OUT Wire Color BLACK BROWN DRAIN BLACK WHITE BLUE BLACK BLACK GREEN BLACK YELLOW Table O1: Pin layout Details Perform the continuity test with both the Volt Ohm Meter (VOM) and the power/data cable tester. If the power/data cable tester is not available, perform the continuity test with the VOM. Required Equipment
+12V A
+12V A RTN Heater GND (Shield Wire) RX_EN_B-
RX_EN_B+
RX_EN_A+
RX_EN_A-
Diagbus-
Diagbus+
+12V B Return
+12V B VOM Continuity tester Jumper for shorting pins RFS power/data cable tester PAIR PAIR PAIR Continuity Test With VOM Step 1. On one end of the cable, short a pair of conductors using a shorting device. Step 2. Using a VOM/Digital Volt Meter (DVM) set to ohms, verify a short is present on the pair at the other end. Step 3. Leaving one probe on one of the paired pins, contact all of the other pins with the other probe, ensuring an open connection. Step 4. Check all 6 pairs of wires in the same manner. Step 5. Verify continuity from the connector case to the drain wire (pin D) on each end of the cable and between each connector case. Step 6. Verify an open circuit from the connector case to each individual wire, except to the drain wire. 182 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Continuity Test With Power/Data Cable Tester Step 1. Connect one end of the power/data cable to the connector on the power/data cable tester. Step 2. Using a VOM/DVM set to ohms, check resistance to ground on the other end of the cable. Resistance is checked from the case of the connector to the individual pin. Resistance readings (+/ 10 percent ) are shown in Table O2. Table O2: Resistance to Ground Pin A B E F Resistance 1K ohms 2K ohms 3.3K ohms 5.1K ohms Pin G H L M Resistance 6.2K ohms 8.2K ohms 10K ohms 12K ohms Step 3. Using a VOM/DVM set to ohms, check resistance between the pairs on the other end of the cable. Resistance should be the sum of the resistance of the two pairs, +/ 10 percent. Refer to Table O3. Table O3: Resistance of Two Pairs Pins A & B E & F Resistance 3K ohms 8.4K ohms Pins G & H L & M Resistance 14.4K ohms 22K ohms Step 4. Remove the power/data cable tester from the power/data cable. Sweep Test of RF Cables & RFS Sweep testing of the RF cables and the RFS is performed in three separate steps.
?? Sweep of the cables
?? Sweep of the RFS
?? Sweep of the cables and the RFS together All results will be entered in the RFS System Test Form, P/N 40-00093-00. The total of the insertion loss for the cables and the RFS will be equal to the insertion loss of both parts swept together. Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 183 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Equipment Required
Signal Generator - Agilent 8648C, or suitable alternative, tunable to the RFS center frequency Spectrum Analyzer - Agilent E4402B, or equivalent Signal Generator cable and Spectrum Analyzer cable Gender can be changed using a barrel connector Male and Female barrel connectors for Signal Generator cable and Spectrum Analyzer cable connections Power/data test cable Navini RFS Test Box Span 5 MHz RBW 100 KHz VBW 100 KHz Sweep Time Auto Frequency (Provided in Table O4)
Equipment Settings Spectrum Analyzer:
Signal Generator:
Test Setup When performing each type of sweep, the sweep has to be performed at certain frequency intervals (Table C5). Perform the complete test at the first frequency. Go to the next frequency and recalibrate the test setup. Perform the complete test again. Do the same for the third frequency. Refer to Figure O2. Table O4: Sweep Frequencies Amplitude 0 dB Frequency (Provided in Table O4) System 2.3 GHz High band 2.3 GHz Low band 2.4 GHz 2.5 GHz 2.6 GHz 2.6 GHz EFGH Sweep 1 2348.25 2307.50 2400.00 2500.00 2602.00 2602.00 Sweep 2 2352.50 2312.50 2440.00 2548.00 2620.00 2641.00 Sweep 3 2357.50 2316.75 2473.50 2596.00 2641.00 2683.00 184 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Signal Generator Signal Generator Spectrum Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer 1. Connect the Signal Generator cable to the Signal Generator. 2. Connect the Spectrum Analyzer cable to the Spectrum Analyzer. 3. Connect the other end of the cables together. Use a barrel connector if needed. Figure O2: Test Setup Test Procedure The following procedures are for the Agilent E4402B Spectrum Analyzer. If alternative equipment is used, refer to the manufacturers calibration procedures. The key point is to make accurate microwave frequency power measurements. Step 1. Turn the Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer on. Allow the equipment to warm Spectrum Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer Barrel Connector Barrel Connector Signal Generator Signal Generator
(if needed)
(if needed) Cable Cable Cable Cable up for 15 minutes for the output to stabilize. Step 2. Set the Signal Generator frequency to the desired test frequency (Table O4) of the RFS under test. Step 3. Set the Signal Generator output amplitude to 0 dBm. Step 4. Set the center frequency of the Spectrum Analyzer to the center frequency of the RFS under test. Step 5. Set the Spectrum Analyzer to Span = 5 MHz and Resolution Bandwidth = 100 kHz. Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 185 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Step 6. Take a marker measurement on the Spectrum Analyzer by using the marker to peak or the peak search function. The screen on the Spectrum Analyzer should look similar to that shown in Figure O3. Figure O3: Sweep Test Marker Measurement Example If the marker measurement doesnt read 0.0 dBm, adjust the amplitude on the Signal Generator until the Spectrum Analyzer marker reads 0.0 dBm, or as close to 0.0 dBm as possible. This will remove all losses associated with the test cables. All measurement data should be recorded one digit to the right of the decimal point, for example, 31.5dB. Once the test setup is calibrated, these cables will remain in place and will be used throughout the whole test. If the test cables are removed or changed, incorrect readings will result. RF Cable Insertion Loss This test is performed on all RF cables that are installed in the system. This includes the eight antenna cables, the system calibration cable, and all jumper cables. Follow the procedures for either the cables on the ground or cables run up the tower. Test Procedure For RF Cables on the Ground Step 1. Ensure calibration of the test setup has been performed each time the test frequency is Step 2. changed. If present, remove the barrel connector from between the Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer cables. Step 3. Connect the cable from the Signal Generator to one end of the cable. Use a barrel connector to change the gender, if required. Step 4. Connect the cable from the Spectrum Analyzer to the other end of the cable. Use a barrel connector to change the gender, if required. 186 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Step 5. Take a marker measurement on the Spectrum Analyzer by using the marker to peak or the peak search function. The screen on the Spectrum Analyzer should look similar to the one shown in Figure O4. Figure O4: Insertion Loss (Cables on Ground) Marker Measurement Example Step 6. The result should be within +/ 0.5 dB of the calculated value. If the insertion loss results do not agree with the manufacturers data, check the connectors for proper connection to the cable, and check for kinks in the cable. If the Spectrum Analyzer has a distance to fault (DTF) function, it can be used to help troubleshoot kinks in the cable. CAUTION! Cables with results greater than the specified limits (i.e., 2 or 3 dB high) should not be installed, as a potential hardware fault exists. Step 7. Record the data in the RFS System Test Form under MAIN FEEDER LOSS or JUMPER LOSS. Ensure that the information is recorded under the channel number that is on the cable label. Step 8. Repeat steps 3 through 7 for all remaining cables and jumpers. Step 9. Change the frequency to the next test frequency (refer back to the Test Setup section of these procedures). Perform steps 1 through 8 until all cables have been successfully tested at the frequencies shown in Table O4. Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 187 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Test Procedure For RF Cables Already Run Up the Tower Step 1. Ensure calibration of the test setup has been performed each time the test frequency is Step 2. changed. If present, remove the barrel connector from between the Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer cables. Step 3. Have a member of the tower crew positioned on the tower, at the upper end of the cables, connect the calibration cable to antenna cable 1 with a barrel connector. Step 4. At the lower end of the RF cables, connect the cable from the Signal Generator to the calibration cable. Use a barrel connector to change the gender, if required. Step 5. Connect the cable from the Spectrum Analyzer to antenna cable 1. Use a barrel connector to change the gender, if required. Step 6. Calculate the marker using the following formula: (the length of BOTH the calibration cable and the antenna cable) x (loss per foot at the RFS center frequency for the type of cable used). Step 7. Take a marker measurement on the Spectrum Analyzer by using the marker to peak or the peak search function. The screen on the Spectrum Analyzer should look similar to the one shown in Figure O5. Figure O5: Insertion Loss (Cables on Tower) Marker Measurement Example Step 8. The result should be within +/ 0.5 dB of the calculated value. If the insertion loss results do not agree with the manufacturers data, check the cable connectors for proper connection to the cable, and check for kinks in the cable. If the Spectrum Analyzer has a distance to fault (DTF) function, this can be used to help troubleshoot kinks in the cable. 188 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Step 9. Divide this value in half and assign the result to the calibration cable and to the antenna cable. Caution: Cables with results greater than the specified limits (i.e., 2 or 3 dB high) should not be installed, as a potential hardware fault exists. Step 10. Record the data in the RFS System Test Form under MAIN FEEDER LOSS. Ensure that the information is recorded under the channel number that is on the cable label. Step 11. Repeat steps 3 through 10 for antenna cables 2 through 8. Step 12. When finished, take the average of the eight values obtained for the calibration cable. Use this value for the insertion loss of the calibration cable. Step 13. Change the frequency to the next test frequency (refer back to Test Setup). Perform steps 1 through 12 until all cables have been successfully tested at the frequencies given in Table O4. Step 14. Check the value of the nine jumpers at all three frequencies, per the procedure for cables on the ground. Record the data in the RFS System Test Form under JUMPER LOSS. Ensure that the information is recorded under the channel number that is on the cable label. RFS Test Box Setup Step 1. For RFS only testing, connect the power/data test cable to the data connector on the RFS and to the RFS Test Box.
- OR -
For RFS and cable testing, connect the installation power/data cable to the data connector on the RFS and to the RFS Test Box. Refer to Figure O6. Step 2. Connect the RFS Test Box power supply to the RFS Test Box. Step 3. Plug the RFS Test Box power supply into a 110 VAC outlet. Figure O6: RFS Only Testing Setup RFS Test Box RFS Test Box power supply power supply Power/Data cable Power/Data cable connected to the RFS connected to the RFS RFS Test Box RFS Test Box Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 189 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. RFS Only Transmit Verification Ensure that the calibration of the test setup and RFS Test Box setup for RFS Only has been performed each time the test frequency is changed. Refer to Figure O7. Step 1. Switch the RFS Test Box to the transmit (Tx) mode. Step 2. Connect the cable from the Spectrum Analyzer to the RFS cal connector. Use a barrel connector to change the gender, if required. Step 3. Connect the cable from the Signal Generator to the RFS antenna input number 1. Use a barrel connector to change the gender, if required. Barrel connector Barrel connector Figure O7: RFS Only Tx Verification Spectrum Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer cable to RFS cal cable to RFS cal connector connector Signal Generator Signal Generator cable to RFS cable to RFS antenna 1 connector antenna 1 connector Note: The position of the RFS will vary the sweep results due to reflections from the test surface. Step 4. Take a marker measurement on the Spectrum Analyzer by using the marker to peak or the peak search function. The screen on the Spectrum Analyzer should look similar to the one shown in Figure O8. 190 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Figure O8: RFS Only Tx Marker Measurement Example Step 5. The marker value should be equal to the RFS Only Tx insertion loss within +/ 2.0 dB, per the manufacturers data. If the insertion loss results do not agree with the manufacturers data, check the test setup. Caution: An RFS with results greater than the +/ 2.0 dB limits should not be installed, as a potential hardware fault exists. Contact Navini Networks Technical Support. Step 6. Record the data in the RFS System Test Form under RFS TX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY). Ensure that the information is recorded under the channel number of the RFS antenna that is being tested. Step 7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 for the remaining seven antenna inputs on the RFS. Step 8. Change to the next test frequency (refer back to Test Setup). Perform steps 1 through 8 until the RFS has been successfully tested at the frequencies shown in Table O4. RFS Only Receive Verification Step 1. Ensure calibration of the test setup and RFS Test Box setup for RFS Only has been performed each time the test frequency is changed. Step 2. Switch the RFS Test Box to the Receive (Rx) mode. Step 3. Connect the cable from the Signal Generator to the RFS cal connector. Use a barrel connector to change the gender, if required. Step 4. Connect the cable from the Spectrum Analyzer to the RFS antenna input number 1. Use a barrel connector to change the gender, if required. See Figure O9. Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 191 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Signal Generator Signal Generator cable to RFS cal cable to RFS cal connector connector Figure O9: RFS Only Rx Verification Barrel connector Barrel connector Spectrum Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer cable to RFS antenna cable to RFS antenna 1 connector 1 connector Note: The position of the RFS will vary the sweep results due to reflections from the test surface. Step 5. Take a marker measurement on the Spectrum Analyzer by using the marker to peak or the peak search function. The screen on the Spectrum Analyzer should look similar to the one shown in Figure O10. Figure O10: RFS Only Rx Marker Measurement Example 192 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Step 6. The marker value should be equal to the RFS Only Rx insertion loss within +/ 2.0 dB, per the manufacturers data. If the insertion loss results do not agree with the manufacturers data, check the test setup. Caution: An RFS with results greater than the +/ 2.0 dB limits should not be installed, as a potential hardware fault exists. Contact Navini Networks Technical Support. Step 7. Record the data in the RFS System Test Form under RFS RX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY). Ensure that the information is recorded under the channel number that is on the RFS antenna that is being tested. Step 8. Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the remaining seven antenna inputs on the RFS. Step 9. Change the frequency to the next test frequency (refer back to Test Setup). Perform steps 1 through 8 until the RFS has been successfully tested at the frequencies shown in Table O4. RFS & Cables Transmit Verification This test is performed after the RFS is installed and the antenna cables, calibration cable, and power/data cable are connected to the inputs on the RFS. Step 1. Ensure calibration of the test setup and RFS Test Box setup for RFS and cables has been performed each time the test frequency is changed. Step 2. Switch the RFS Test Box to the Transmit (Tx) mode. Step 3. Connect the cable from the Spectrum Analyzer to the RFS calibration cable connector. Use a barrel connector to change the gender, if required. Step 4. Connect the cable from the Signal Generator to the RFS antenna cable number 1 connector. Use a barrel connector to change the gender, if required. Step 5. Take a marker measurement on the Spectrum Analyzer by using the marker to peak or the peak search function. The screen on the Spectrum Analyzer should look similar to the one shown in Figure O11. Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 193 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Figure O11: RFS & Cables Tx Marker Measurement Example Step 6. The marker value should be equal to the RFS Only Tx insertion loss + calibration cable loss + antenna cable loss + antenna cable jumper loss. Transmit insertion loss should be within +/ 2.0 dB of the sum of the parts. If the insertion loss results do not agree with the manufacturers data, check the test setup and the cable connections. Caution: If RFS & cables test results are greater than the +/ 2.0 dB limits, they should not be installed on a tower, as a potential hardware fault exists. Verify the connections and contact Navini Networks Technical Support. Step 7. Record the data in the RFS System Test Form under TOTAL TX PATH LOSS
(CABLE-RFS). Ensure that the information is recorded under the channel number that is on the cable label. Step 8. Repeat steps 5 through 7 for the remaining seven antenna cable inputs on the RFS. Step 9. Change the frequency to the next test frequency (refer to Test Setup). Perform steps 1 through 8 until the RFS has been successfully tested at the frequencies shown in Table O4. 194 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide RFS & Cables Receive Verification This test is performed after the RFS is installed and the antenna cables, calibration cable, and power/data cable are connected to the inputs on the RFS. Step 1. Ensure that the calibration of the test setup and RFS Test Box setup for RFS and cables has been performed each time the test frequency is changed. Step 2. Switch the RFS Test Box to the Receive (Rx) mode. Step 3. If present, remove the barrel connector from between the Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer cables. Step 4. Connect the cable from the Signal Generator to the RFS calibration cable connector. Use a barrel connector to change the gender, if required. Step 5. Connect the cable from the Spectrum Analyzer to the RFS antenna cable number 1 connector. Use a barrel connector to change the gender, if required. Take a marker measurement on the Spectrum Analyzer by using the marker to peak or the peak search function. The screen on the Spectrum Analyzer should look similar to the one shown in Figure O12. Figure O12: RFS & Cables Rx Marker Measurement Example The marker value should be equal to the RFS Only RX Insertion Loss + Calibration Cable Loss
+ Antenna Cable Loss + Antenna Cable Jumper Loss. RX Insertion Loss should be within +/
2.0 dB of the sum of the parts. If the Insertion Loss results do not agree with the manufacturers data, check the test setup and the cable connections. Caution: If RFS & cables test results are greater than the +/ 2.0 dB limits, they should not be installed on a tower, as a potential hardware fault exists. Verify connections and contact Navini Networks Technical Support. Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 195 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Record the data in the RFS System Test Form under TOTAL RX PATH LOSS (CABLE-
RFS). Ensure that the information is recorded under the channel number that is on the cable label. Repeat steps 5 through 8 for the remaining seven antenna cable inputs on the RFS. Change the frequency to the next test frequency (refer to Test Setup). Perform steps 1 through 9 until the RFS has been successfully tested at the frequencies given in Table O4. Procedures TTA Base Station Equipment Required
?? Signal Generator - Agilent 8648D, or suitable alternative, tunable to the RFS center frequency
?? Spectrum Analyzer - Agilent E4404B, or equivalent
?? QMA female to SMA Female adapter
?? SMA male to N-type male test cable (Note: The cable can be changed but additional adapters will be required.)
?? RFS test box for RFS tests only (not required for cable tests) see Figure O13 Figure O13: RFS & RFC Test Box
?? JP1 - Cable port to be connected to the RFC or the RFS.
?? M1/M2 - RFC DC output test points.
?? Load Button - Tests RFC full Current load. Used in conjunction with Power LED by JP1.
?? RX/TX switch - Supplies power to the RX or RX circuit in the RFS.
?? RFC/RFS switch - Moved to the RFS for testing of the RFS and to the RFC for testing of the RFC.
?? 10.7MHz - Test point to measure the 10.7 MHz signal output of the RFC.
?? J1 - External control of switches. (Engineering
?? P1 - DC power supply connection. (Used for RFS
?? JP2 - Connection point for test equipment (DC use only) testing only) blocked port) 196 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Equipment Set-up
Spectrum Analyzer - connected to the test cable / QMA adapter on BTS end Set to frequency to be tested 10 MHz 100 KHz 100 KHz Auto Center Frequency:
Span:
Resolution Bandwidth:
Video Bandwidth:
Sweep Time:
Signal Generator - connected to the RFS cable end Frequency:
Signal Level:
Set to frequency to be tested 0 dB Equipment Calibration Refer to Figure O14 to calibrate the test equipment. Step 1. Perform Equipment Set-Up. Step 2. Connect the test cable from the RF Output of the Signal Generator to the RF input of the Spectrum Analyzer. Step 3. Turn on the RF output of the Signal Generator. Step 4. Perform a peak search on the Spectrum Analyzer. Step 5. Set a Delta point. The Delta sets a zero point on the Spectrum Analyzer so that when any additional cable or equipment is added to the link the new loss reading can be recorded. (Note: If the Spectrum Analyzer does not have a Delta function, increase the output of the Signal Generator until there is a 0 dB reading on the Spectrum Analyzer.) Signal Generator Figure O14: Calibrate Test Equipment Spectrum Analyzer Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 197 Test cable Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. RF Cable Sweeps Procedure This section provides step-by-step procedures for calibrating the test equipment and performing insertion loss measurements of the RF cable. Refer to Figure O15. Step 1. Calibrate the test equipment. Step 2. Connect Signal Generator to cable 1 on the RFS side to the RF cable. Step 3. Connect spectrum analyzer to cable 1 on BTS side of RF cable. This will be done with the test cable and the QMA/SMA adapter. Step 4. Enable the RF on the signal generator. Step 5. From the Delta marker found in Step 1 take the loss reading in db. Record the results. Step 6. Perform steps 2 through 5 for all cables. Figure O15: RF Cable Test BTS End QMA RFS End N-Type RF Cable RFS Test Procedure This procedure is performed twice for an installation. The first sweep is performed prior to mounting the RFS on the tower. This test verifies that all the equipment is in tact from shipment. These sweeps will need to be compared to the factory sweeps that are shipped with the RFS. The second sweep is performed after the RFS has been mounted on the tower and the RF cables have been connected. This sweep verifies that no damage was done to the RFS when hoisting it, and that the RF cables are properly connected to the RFS. Step 1. Perform the Equipment Set-up. Note: When performing the transmit (TX) side tests on the RFS, the signal level from the Signal Generator needs to be lowered to at least 20 dB. The RFS has protection circuits built in and will disable the PAs in the RFS if the incoming signal is too high. Step 2. Perform the Equipment Calibration. Step 3. Configure the test equipment as shown in Figure O16.
?? Spectrum Analyzer to the Cal Port
?? Signal Generator to the test equipment port of the test box.
?? Test box RFC/RFS port to the antenna 198 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Signal Generator Spectrum Analyzer Figure O16: Transmit Side Step 4. Set the test box to RFS and TX. Step 5. From the Delta marker established during the calibration, record the insertion loss dB Test cable Test cable Test cable RFS c a l 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 level. Step 6. Perform Step 5 for all eight antennas. Step 7. Set the Signal Generator output level to 0 dB and recalibrate the test equipment. Step 8. Configure the test equipment as shown in Figure O17.
?? Signal Generator to the Cal Port
?? Spectrum Analyzer to the test equipment port of the test box.
?? Test box RFC/RFS port to the antenna Figure O17: Receive Side Spectrum Analyzer Signal Generator RFS 8 4 7 3 c a l 6 2 5 1 Test cable Test cable Test cable Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 199 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Step 9. Set the test box to RX. Step 10. From the Delta maker set on calibration, record the insertion loss value from the Spectrum Analyzer. Step 11. Repeat Step 10 for all eight antennas. Compare all recorded TX and RX values with the factory sweep results that are shipped with the RFS. If there is a mismatch, contact Navini Technical Support. 200 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide 2.4 RFS System Test Form (Combo & Split Chassis) 2.4 GHz RFS INSTALL TEST RESULT FORM RFS SN NAME DATE MEASUREMENT DESCRIPTION CHANNEL 2400MHz 2440MHz 2473MHz RFS TX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS TX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS TX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS TX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS TX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS TX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS TX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS TX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS RX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS RX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS RX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS RX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS RX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS RX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS RX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS RX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) JUMPER LOSS JUMPER LOSS JUMPER LOSS JUMPER LOSS JUMPER LOSS JUMPER LOSS JUMPER LOSS JUMPER LOSS JUMPER LOSS MAIN FEEDER LOSS MAIN FEEDER LOSS MAIN FEEDER LOSS MAIN FEEDER LOSS MAIN FEEDER LOSS MAIN FEEDER LOSS MAIN FEEDER LOSS MAIN FEEDER LOSS MAIN FEEDER LOSS TOTAL CABLE RUN LOSS TOTAL CABLE RUN LOSS TOTAL CABLE RUN LOSS TOTAL CABLE RUN LOSS TOTAL CABLE RUN LOSS TOTAL CABLE RUN LOSS TOTAL CABLE RUN LOSS TOTAL CABLE RUN LOSS TOTAL CABLE RUN LOSS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CAL CAL CAL TOTAL TX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL TX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL TX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL TX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL TX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL TX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL TX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL TX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL RX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL RX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL RX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL RX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL RX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
AVERAGE
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 201 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. 2.6 RFS System Test Form MEASUREMENT DESCRIPTION CHANNEL RFS TX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS TX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS TX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS TX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS TX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS TX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS TX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS TX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS RX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS RX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS RX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS RX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS RX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS RX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS RX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) RFS RX PATH LOSS (RFS ONLY) JUMPER LOSS (Measured) JUMPER LOSS (Measured) JUMPER LOSS (Measured) JUMPER LOSS (Measured) JUMPER LOSS (Measured) JUMPER LOSS (Measured) JUMPER LOSS (Measured) JUMPER LOSS (Measured) JUMPER LOSS (Measured) MAIN FEEDER LOSS (Measured) MAIN FEEDER LOSS (Measured) MAIN FEEDER LOSS (Measured) MAIN FEEDER LOSS (Measured) MAIN FEEDER LOSS (Measured) MAIN FEEDER LOSS (Measured) MAIN FEEDER LOSS (Measured) MAIN FEEDER LOSS (Measured) MAIN FEEDER LOSS (Measured) TOTAL CABLE RUN LOSS (Measured) TOTAL CABLE RUN LOSS (Measured) TOTAL CABLE RUN LOSS (Measured) TOTAL CABLE RUN LOSS (Measured) TOTAL CABLE RUN LOSS (Measured) TOTAL CABLE RUN LOSS (Measured) TOTAL CABLE RUN LOSS (Measured) TOTAL CABLE RUN LOSS (Measured) TOTAL CABLE RUN LOSS (Measured) TOTAL TX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL TX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL TX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL TX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL TX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL TX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL TX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL TX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL RX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL RX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL RX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL RX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) TOTAL RX PATH LOSS (CABLE-RFS) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CAL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CAL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CAL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
2.6 GHz RFS INSTALL TEST RESULT FORM RFS SN NAME DATE
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
AVERAGE
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00
- 0.00 202 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Appendix P: Chassis Alarms The chassis contains two connectors that are used to send alarm indications to the BTS. One of the connectors, labeled CABINET ALARM, is used to trigger alarm conditions that occur within the external chassis. The second connector, labeled BBU, is used to process alarms from the battery backup unit. Both connectors contain six pins, which are numbered as shown in Figure P1. This figure also shows the CAL and GPS-B connectors for size reference. Figure P1: Pin Orientation 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 203 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. The alarm connector uses only four of the six pins. The pin names can be found in Table P1. Table P1: Pin Names Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 Name General Fail Alarm Ground reference for General Fail Alarm Door Open Alarm Ground reference for Door Open Alarm Not Connected Not Connected The first pin of the alarm connector is the General Fail Alarm. This signal should be left open to indicate an alarm condition from the HMC module located in the outdoor chassis. If no alarm condition exists, this pin should be driven low. Pin 2 is used as the ground reference for this alarm. The second alarm sent to the chassis is located on pin 3, Door Open Alarm. This signal should be driven low when the door is closed. To indicate that the door of the outdoor chassis is open, this signal should be left open. The associated ground reference for this signal is taken from pin 4. The BBU connector contains four alarm signals. These signal names are listed in Table P2. Table P2: BBU Signal Names Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 Name Digital Ground Reference BBU Battery Low BBU Rectifier Fail BBU AC Line Fail BBU Charge Fail Analog Ground Reference The first alarm signal is located on pin 2, BBU Battery Low. If the BBUs battery is running low, the signal on pin 2 should be left open. BBU Rectifier Fail alarm is the next alarm and is located on pin 3. This signal should be left open to indicate a failure on the Battery Backup Units rectifier. The next alarm condition occurs if the AC Line to the BBU fails. In this condition, signal BBU AC Line Fail on pin 4 should be left open. If the BBU is unable to hold a charge, then the BBU Charge Fail signal on pin 5 should be left open. For non-alarm conditions (normal operation), these signals should be driven low. The digital ground reference for these signals is located on pin 3. The analog ground reference should be located on pin 4. 204 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Appendix Q: Sample Tri-sector BTS Grounding Refer to the Regulatory Information in Chapter 1, Page 8, regarding UL and NEC/CEC compliance. Same Centerpoise ground system <5 ohm Power System Distribution Panel
(Will vary per Manufacture) POWER RACK SPACE AND CONFIGURATION WILL VARY PER VENDOR Power / Data Cable Lightning Protectors APPROXIMATE GROUND LINE LUG TYPE AND QUANTITY
#6AWG 1 HOLE = 12
#6AWG 2 HOLE = 20
#2AWG 2 HOLE = 2+
Navini RFS Building steel, Centerpoise ground, or tower structure Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 205 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. 206 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Appendix R: Sample Tri-sector BTS Power Refer to the Regulatory Information in Chapter 1, Page 8, regarding UL and NEC/CEC compliance. REQUIRED DC BREAKER AMPERAGE AND QUANTITY 3 X 50A - FOR RF SHELF 3 X 20A FOR DIGITAL SHELF APROXIMATE DC LINE LUG TYPE AND QUANTITY
#6AWG 1 HOLE = 12
#6AWG 2 HOLE = 12 POWER RACK SPACE AND CONFIGURATION WILL VARY PER VENDOR Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 207 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. 208 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Appendix S: Single Antenna Test Procedure Objective The object of the RFS Single Antenna Test Procedure is to verify the functionality of each antenna element in the Ripwave Radio Frequency Subsystem (RFS). The 8 antenna elements work together to create the beamforming that results from using a Smart Antenna - Phased Array technology. Using 8 combined single antenna elements creates the beamed radiation that is part of what constitutes the gain of up to 18 dB during transmission of data. Each antenna element has an associated (and hard cabled) RF/Power Amplifier (PA) card in the Base Transceiver Station (BTS). In order to verify the correct beamforming and that each single antenna is working properly, we have to turn off the individual PA that controls each antenna element, one at a time. The Single Antenna Test should be performed after completing an equipment check and after performing the Base Station Calibration Verification* procedure described in the Ripwave Base Station Installation & Commissioning Guide. This test is necessary since an equipment check does not check the functionality of the RFS, and the Calibration Verification only sweeps for losses in the RFS, not RFS functionality.
*Note: The Calibration Verification, where you check both transmit power and receive sensitivity, is also sometimes referred to as the RF Sanity test. More specifically, the Single Antenna Test checks the following:
1. Low Noise Amplifier (LNA) at the RFS. LNAs are an integral part of the smart antenna technology. 2. Power Amplifiers. Each PA is a module in the BTS RF shelf that creates the RF transmission. With one per element, there are a total of 8 PAs in the shelf. The transmission is measured in dBm. This is what makes possible the transfer of data over-
the-air. 3. Modulations. As each antenna element is checked, the variable modulations are tested. The higher the modulation, the higher the power and the better the data rate. The test ensures that all modulations possible, i.e., QPSK, 8PSK, and QAM16, are working properly. Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 209 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Panel Procedure Overview Assuming the equipment has been installed and you have performed the calibration verification, if the results were erroneous this Single Antenna Test will not be valid. It is important to complete those two steps successfully before continuing. For this test you will need two people. One person will verify the reception (Rx) of each antenna using the Constellation Debugger Tool and a Modem. The following summarizes what will happen during this test:
1. Person A will stay where the BTS or EMS is located. This person will control each PA in the BTS to be tested. 2. Person B will be in the field. This person will pick a complete Line of Sight (LOS) test point to the RFS (antenna). Person B will use the Constellation Debugger software supplied by Navini. This software allows the tester to verify functionality. 3. Once the two people are in place, start by turning all antennas off except for Antenna #1. NOTE: It does not matter which antenna you start with as long as the tester can keep track of which ones have been tested and each ones results. 4. With only one antenna powered on, Person B verifies the transmission, modulation, and signal strength of the single antenna. Person B verifies this information for at least 30 seconds. 5. When the first antenna is checked, Person A saves the file and waits for Person B to power on Antenna #2. 6. Steps 3 through 5 are repeated for each antenna element. Details The following provides more detail for each step, and includes snapshots of what to change and what to measure. Step 1. After calibration verifications are successful, in EMS click on the BTS tab and highlight the specific BTS. Go to Air Interface > Layer 1, and click on the Antenna Table tab (Figure S1). This window will show all antennas and their PA status. 210 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Figure S1: Antenna Tab Step 2. After checking that all PAs are up and running, next click on Configure (Figure S2). This function will take you to the configuration mode of this particular window. Figure S2: Configure Antenna Table Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 211 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Step 3. Click on the button, Modify All. This function will allow you to modify all antennas and PAs at the same time. Notice that this window allows you to configure any column shown here. For our purpose we will only use the second column, Admin Status (Figure S3). This column shows the state of each PA that controls each antenna in the RFS. Up means the antenna and PA are on and functioning. Down means the antenna and PA are off and not transmitting. Figure S3: Modify All Step 4. Next, turn off (no transmission) all of the antennas and PAs except for Antenna #1. This begins the verification of this antenna. Refer to Figure S4. When only Antenna #1 is powered up and transmitting, the second person will verify at the other end that the antenna is actually transmitting information to the Modem. This can be completed by doing a Ping at the Modem side. 212 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Figure S4: Antenna #1 On Step 5. Start a Ping with the Modem and PC performing the test, observing the Constellation Debugger tool. Look for the following values:
ACC Signal Strength Absolute Sync Signal Processed Sync Signal These values, an example of which is shown in Figure S5, give you an indication if there is something wrong with the antenna. If the values are too low or you do not see a response from your Ping, it means that the antenna and/or the PA are not functioning properly. Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 213 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Figure S5: Constellation Debugger Values Step 6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 to verify each one of the antennas and the PAs. The verification of each antenna concludes the testing procedure. 214 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Comments & Suggestions 1. Navini Smart Antenna technology uses all the 8 antenna elements for the optimum performance of the system. It is recommended that all antennas are verified and working properly. If one of the antennas or PAs malfunctions or it breaks, the RFS will still work. It will not work at its optimum operation, but it will still be functioning equipment. It is recommended that you change or swap the bad board or equipment. 2. For the testing of each antenna it is recommended that you pick only one spot to measure the Rx side of the RFS. This spot must to be at a distance of 2-3 km with clear line-of-
sight. 3. A difference of more than 2 dB between the Absolute and Processed SYNC Signal strength, typically indicates the presence of multipath in the environment. Omni Procedure
<This info will be added at a later date>
Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 215 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. 216 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Appendix T: Base Station Installation Certification COMPANY SITE NAME SITE NO LOCATION BTS SITE COMPLETION CERTIFICATION MONOPOLE OMNI CO-LOCATE SECTORIZED O T H E R 2.3GHz 2.4GHz 2.5GHz 2.6GHz 0 Degree 2 Degree 4 Degree Uptilt 6 Degree Downtilt INDOOR OUTDOOR SITE TYPE ANTENNA TYPE ANTENNA AZIMUTH FREQUENCY BAND BTS CENTER FREQUENCY RFS ELECTRICAL DOWNTILT RFS MECHANICAL TILT RFS OVERALL DOWNTILT BTS ENCLOSURE A Equipment Installed in Building 1 Equipment Installed and Secured Per Plan 2 Roof/Ceiling/Wall Penetrations Patched, Sealed and Painted 3 Penetration(s) Inspected by Landowner Representative B Equipment Installed on Roof 1 Equipment Installed and Secured Per Plan 2 Structural Upgrades to Roof Installed Per Plan 3 Equipment Support Frame Installed C Equipment Installed on Grade 1 Equipment Installed and Secured Per Plan 2 Special Inspection for Foundation Steel Complete 3 Concrete Placed and Vibrated 4 Concrete Break Test Report Complete D Civil/Site Work 1 Fencing Complete (Tie-In to Ground System) Per Plan 2 Gravel/Crushed Rock Placed over Weed Barrier 3 Above Ground Conduits Installed Plumb 4 Landscaping/ Erosion Control Complete Per Plan 5 Access Road Complete Per Plan 6 All Trash and Debris Hauled Off Site 7 Site Area restored to Original Condition 8 Unistruts, iron angles and Rods properly cold galvanized 9 RF Safety Signage Installed where Required YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES OTHER NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 217 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. E Monopole/Tower 1 Monopole/Tower Plumb, Torqued and Free of Visible Defects 2 Orientation of Monopole/Tower Per Plan 3 Safety Climb Installed and Tensioned per Manufacturer Spec. 4 Weep Hole Free of Obstructions 5 Step Bolts Installed/ Removed Below 30 feet 6 Monopole/Tower Tie-In to Ground Ring Complete F Grounding 1 Monopole/Tower Grounding Installed 2 Ground Wire Types and Size meet construction Specs 3 Lightning Rod Provided and Installed Per Plan 4 5 Ohm Megger Ground Resistance Test Complete 5 Buss Bars Installed Per Plan 6 Surge Protector Installed Between RFS Antenna and Cable 7 Coax Ground Kits Installed at RFS Antenna Per Plan 8 Coax Ground Kits Installed at Tower Base Per Plan 9 Coax Ground Kits Installed at Buss Bar Prior to BTS Per Plan 10 Double Lug Connectors Used at All Buss Bar Attachments 11 Cable Tray/Ice Bridge Bonded and Grounded to Buss Bar 12 Surge Protectors Mounted and Secured on ground Buss Bar 13 Master Ground Buss Bar Tied-In to Ground Ring 14 Equipment Rack Ground Per Plan 15 Power Supply/UPS, Rectifier Ground Per Plan 16 Meter and Telco box Ground Per Plan 17 Fence Work Grounded Per Plan 18 Additional Equipment Tied-In to BTS properly Grounded G Electrical, Telco and Network 1 Power and Telco Conduits Installed Per Plan 2 Conduits Are Labeled and Pull Strings are Provided 3 Meter and Telco Box are Installed Per Plan 4 Circuit Breakers Installed and Properly Labeled 5 UPS Installed and All Internal Connections Made 6 Rectifier Installed, Output and Wiring to BTS Checked 7 Telco Tie-In to Source, Tested and Complete 8 Network/Telco Tie-In to BTS, Tested and Complete 9 EMS Installed and Connected to Network YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 218 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide H BTS System 1 Cabinet is Positioned, Secured and Leveled Per Plan 2 Cabinet Outer Surfaces Free from scratches, dents, corrosion 3 All Hardware Connections within BTS are tightened/secured 4 RF/GPS Coax Connectors Securely Connected to BTS 5 Signal/Power Cable Securely Connected to BTS 6 Ethernet/T1 cables Dressed and Secured to BTS 7 Documents, License are Stored or Posted on BTS J Antenna and Feeder System 1 RFS Antenna Height and Orientation Per Plan 2 RFS Antenna Mount Plumb Per Axis 3 GPS Antenna Mounted Per Plan 4 Zinc Cold Galvanizing compound used everywhere 5 Coaxial Cables Run Straight (Not Exceeding Bend Radius) 6 Coaxial Cables Tagged and Color Coded Per Plan 7 Connectors and Jumpers Installed and Weatherproofed 8 Cable Hangers, Bands or Ties Spaced up every 3 Feet 9 Antenna Power and Data Cable Continuity Tested 10 Antenna System Sweep Test Performed and Passed 11 SW and Hard Copy of Antenna Sweep Test Results Provided YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NOTES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Printed Name Signature / Date Company Phone No. Printed Name Signature / Date Company Phone No. Printed Name Signature / Date Company Phone No. Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 219 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. COMPANY SITE NAME SITE NO LOCATION 0 0 0 0 Note : Please write all Card Serial Numbers in the Spreadsheet Below PA1 PA2 PA3 PA4 PA5 PA6 PA7 PA8 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 SYN1 SYN2 IF1 IF2 CHP1 CHP2 MDM1 MDM2 CC1 CC2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RF SHELF BTS SN PA1 PA2 PA3 PA4 PA5 RFS SN SYN1 SYN2 IF1 IF2 CHP1 DIGITAL SHELF 220 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Appendix U: Excel Configuration Form The configuration forms are used to plan and design the operating parameters for the system. The parameters for every system element are defined in the EMS Server.
EMS Configuration Data Form
(To configure EMS Servers & Clients in the Ripwave System) Company:__________________________________________________________ Your Name:______________________________________ Date:_____________ NOTE 1: Field Values in gray rows indicate data that ordinarily should not be changed or that is populated automatically by the system. NOTE 2: Default Field Values are underlined. Field Name EMS Id Alarm AutoAck Values True Server Ip Address Database Schema Version Mib Version 01 (example) 1.19.01 (example) BTS/CPE SW Directory loads (example) Description Unique identifier for this EMS. True or False. If True, the EMS will automatically acknowledge all alarms except alarms with a severity level of Warning (blue). An Alarm Engineer will only see current alarms on the system. However, all alarm activity is logged to an alarm file. IP address of the EMS Server. Version of the EMS server database schema. Version of the BTS Management Information Base
(MIB). Directory where BTS and CPE software loads are stored. Used by the EMS to obtain the location of the software loads during downloads. Copy BTS and CPE software loads to this directory during initial installations or upgrades. Otherwise, the EMS cannot download the software to the BTS. This field is used in conjunction with the FTP Server Root Path field by the EMS to obtain the software loads. The full path the EMS searches for software loads is <FTP Server Root Path>\<BTS/CPE SW Directory>. Example - C:\naviniems \ftp\loads. continued Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 221 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Field Name FTP Server Root Path Network ID Values Server Name EMS Version Idl Build Number 1.19.01 (example) 1.18.09 (example) BTS/CPE SW Ftp User Name BTS/CPE SW Ftp Password Confirm Password CPE AutoProvisioning Disabled Description The Root directory where BTS and CPE software loads are stored. This field must match what is configured in the FTP Daemon. Otherwise, the EMS will not be able to download BTS and CPE software loads to the BTS. This path is used by the EMS to obtain the location of the software loads during downloads. Copy BTS and CPE software loads to this root directory during initial installations or upgrades. This field is used in conjunction with the BTS/CPE SW Directory field by the EMS to obtain the software loads. The full path the EMS searches for software loads is <FTP Server Root Path>\<BTS/CPE SW Directory>. Example - C:\naviniems \ftp\loads. Unique identifier for this Service Providers wireless network. Intended to ensure other Service Providers CPEs cannot operate in the identified network. A CPE with a different BTS network ID cannot be provided service by that BTS. Host name of the EMS Server machine. Version of the EMS Server software. CORBA networking software IDL version used by the EMS Server. User name for downloading BTS and CPE software from the EMS. This field must match what is configured in the FTP Daemon. Otherwise, the EMS cannot download BTS and CPE software loads to the BTS. Password used when downloading BTS and CPE software. This field must match what is configured in the FTP Daemon. Otherwise, the EMS cannot download BTS and CPE software loads to the BTS. Password must be re-entered for security purposes. Enable or Disable. Determines if the EMS is in AutoProvision mode during CPE registration. If enabled, the EMS will allow unprovisioned CPEs to access the system with minimum bandwidth for a short period of time. The minimum bandwidth is defined by the first entry in the CPE Descriptor table. Once the CPE is allowed limited access to the system, it can connect to a default web site to enter billing information and the CPE can be provisioned automatically with the EMS. If disabled, the EMS will NOT allow an unprovisioned CPE to access the system. 222 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide BTS Configuration Form Company:_________________________________________________________ Your Name:______________________________________ Date:____________ BTS ID/NAME:____________________________________________________ NOTE 1: Field Values in gray rows indicate data that ordinarily should not be changed or that is populated automatically by the system. NOTE 2: Default Field Values are underlined. General Parameters Field Name RF Admin Status Values Up or Down Connected Status True or False Provisioned Status Provisioned or Unprovisioned Values Field Name BTS IP Address EMS Server IP Address BTS Default Gateway BTS Subnet Mask Street Address City State Zip Status Description Determines if the BTS is transmitting Radio Frequency
(RF). Up means transmitting. Down means not transmitting. To bring the RF Admin Status Up, execute the Enable action. To bring it Down, execute the Disable action. Display only. The user cannot set this field. Indicates if the EMS can communicate with the BTS. The EMS Server sends a message to the BTS periodically. If the BTS responds, the EMS sets this field to True. If the BTS does not respond in a reasonable amount of time, the EMS changes the Connected Status to false. If the Connected Status is False, the EMS will not send any configuration messages to the BTS because it cannot communicate. If Provisioned, the BTS has been configured and is ready for use. IP Description Unique IP address for each BTS. Space bar used to remove or skip existing digits. Unique IP address for an EMS. Defaults to the IP on which the EMS Server is running. Space bar used to remove or skip existing digits. Default Gateway used to route IP packets for a BTS. Subnet Mask used to route IP packets for a BTS. Physical location of this BTS. City in which BTS is located. State in which BTS is located. Zip code for location in which BTS is located continued Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 223 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Field Name BTS ID BTS Name Values Suppress Alarms TRUE or FALSE Suppress CPE Registration TRUE or FALSE Calibration Interval
(hours) Bridge Aging Timer
(minutes) 1 - 24 1 - 60 Enable PVC Loopback TRUE or FALSE BTS Contact Personnel BTS Configuration Source EMS or BTS Ethernet or ATM Unlicensed 2.4 GHz MMDS 2.6 GHz 2.305 GHz - 2.359 GHz 2.40 GHz - 2.473 GHz 2.50 GHz - 2.595 GHz 2.602 - 2.686 GHz Interface Type BTS Profile Type Frequency Description Unique numeric identification number for this BTS. Cannot be changed once the BTS is created in the system. Unique name given to this BTS. No two BTSs can have the same name. To suppress alarms from BTS to EMS, set to TRUE until problem is resolved. Useful if BTS is flooding EMS and affecting its performance. To allow alarms to be sent, set to FALSE. Determines if BTS can send CPE Registration messages to EMS. Useful if BTS is flooding EMS and affecting its performance. To allow messages to be sent, set to FALSE. The interval of hours by which on-line calibration occurs. BTS Bridge Table timer that controls how long a PVC is assigned to an EID (CPE). The PVC to EID association is removed when no user traffic is received for the timer interval. Applicable only when dynamic PVC assignment is used. Determines if any PVC on this BTS can perform loopback test. Textual identification of a contact person for this BTS and how to contact them. Determines where the BTS obtains its configuration data when reset. If provisioning BTS for first time, set to EMS. After successful reset, defaults to BTS. Indicates the backhaul to which the BTS is connected. Select the correct system. 2.4 GHz is the only unlicensed frequency. Any other system, 2.3, 2.5, and 2.6, select MMDS. Scroll bar that allows you to set the center frequency for the BTS operation. The range depends on the type of system, i.e., 2.3 GHz, 2.4 GHz, 2.5 GHz, 2.6 GHz. The field is operated by dragging the slider of the center frequency scroll bar left or right. The center frequency of an MMDS band BTS must match what is hard-wired on the RFS. During installation, the installers should check that the configured center frequency is identical to the center frequency labeled on the Channel Filter component of the RFS. CAUTION: Changing an MMDS BTS center frequency may result in destruction of the PAs. 224 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Diagnostics Description Determines if the BTS Constellation Display application can be logged into and used on this BTS. If set to True, this BTS can be logged into and its Constellation Display viewed. The maximum number of CPEs that can be viewed simultaneously using the BTS Beamforming diagnostic display. Authorized user of all diagnostic tools. The password used to authenticate the login to all diagnostic tools. Determines if the BTS Spectrum Analyzer (frequency) application can be logged into and used on this BTS. Confirms that the correct password is entered. Field Name Enable Const Display Values True or False Max Beamform Displays 0-9 ems True or False User Name Password Enable Spec Analyzer Display Confirm Password Field Name Perf Log Server IP Address Perf Log Storage Directory Performance Values Description IP address of the performance log collection server. The name of the directory at the Performance Log server where the performance logs are to be sent. Note: The location of the log directory is <ftp root directory>\<pm data directory>. Example: If the FTP root directory is set to d:\naviniems \ftp and the pm data directory is set to performance, the location of the log directory will be d:\naviniems \ftp\performance. Therefore, when configuring the FTP Daemon, set the FTP root directory to <ems install directory>\ftp. The interval that the BTS uploads performance data to the EMS. The interval that the BTS collects the performance logs. The FTP user name set in the FTP Daemon running on the server where performance logs are captured. The FTP password set in the FTP Daemon running on the server capturing performance logs. Re-enter password to confirm authorized access. Upload Interval (minutes or hours) Collection Interval
(minutes or hours) Perf Log FTP User Name Perf Log FTP Password Confirm Password Disable, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours, etc. Disable, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 225 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Field Name GPS Latitude GPS Longitude GPS Height (cm) GPS Gmt Offset (min) Values North or South 0 (deg) 0 (min) 0 (sec) East or West 0 (deg) 0 (min) 0 (sec) 0
-360 GPS Description The latitude of the BTS in degrees, minutes, and seconds. The longitude of the BTS in degrees, minutes, and seconds. The height of the BTS in centimeters. The difference in time (minutes) between Greenwich Mean Time (GMT), which is zero, and the time zone where the BTS is located. For example, if the BTS is located in Dallas, Texas, the local time is 6 hours earlier than GMT. In this example, you would enter -360, which is 6 hrs x 60 min. If the local time is ahead of GMT, you would enter a + in front of the number. Neighbor BTS Frequency List Field Name Center Frequency (Scroll Bar) Co-located Values 2.305 GHz - 2.359 GHz 2.40 GHz - 2.473 GHz 2.50 GHz - 2.595 GHz 2.602 - 2.686 GHz Checkmark or blank Description The frequency at which the neighboring BTS is transmitting. Click to place a checkmark indicating that the neighboring BTS is located on the same tower as the current BTS. CPE Ping Table Field Name Ping Sequence IP Address Display String Values 0, 1, 2, 3, etc. Alphanumeric (up to 30 characters) Description Order in which the element with this IP address is pinged. IP address of the element being added to the Ping Table. User-assigned designation (name/string) for this element. 226 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Air Interface Parameters Layer 1 - General Field Name RFS Gps Offset Sync Scale Acc Scale Tcc Scale Max Scale Rx Sensitivity
(dBm) Antenna Power
(dBm) Cal Cable Loss (dB) Values Active or Passive 0 0.1125 0.0557 0.0197 0.2516 100.0 30.0 0.0 Cal Backplane Loss
(dB) Cal Total Loss (dB) 5.0 0.0 Synthesizer Tx Gain Synthesizer Rx Gain Synthesizer Sc Gain Synthesizer Level Description Specifies whether the RFS has active or passive circuitry. This is the GPS timing offset to apply to the BTS in order of chips (2.5us). The GPS offset must be different for each BTS sharing the same frequency so they do not interfere with each other. The scale setting applied to the transmitted synchronization signal. The scale setting applied to the Access Channel. The scale setting applied to the Traffic Channel. The maximum allowable scale setting for each of the above scales: Sync, ACC, TCC. The target Receiver sensitivity for each antenna. This target is used during full calibration. If it is changed, full calibration must be performed for it to take effect. The target antenna power for each antenna. This target is used during full calibration. Entered in the EMS during commissioning as one of several inputs for performing full calibration. This value is the measured calibration cable loss. If it is changed, full calibration must be performed for it to take effect. Calibration Backplane Loss (dB) Displays the total calibration loss, calculated from the values in Cal Cable Loss and Cal Backplane Loss fields. Displays the Transmitter gain setting for the Synthesizer used during calibration. This field is a result that is automatically returned from full calibration. Displays the Receiver gain setting for the Synthesizer used during calibration. This field is a result that is automatically returned from full calibration. Displays the Loopback gain setting for the Synthesizer used during calibration. This field is a result that is automatically returned from full calibration. Displays the power level of the Synthesizer. Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 227 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Layer 1 - Antenna Table Field Name Antenna Index Values 1-8 Admin Status Up or Down Power Splitter_I Power Splitter_Q RF Tx Gain RF Rx Gain 0-255 0-255 Description The number of the antenna (1-8) that maps to a specific antenna element in the RFS. Determines if the antenna is transmitting RF. Up means transmitting; Down means not transmitting. The real element of the calibrator board characteristics that is found in the RFS. This information captures the loss and phase information of the board. The Power Splitter data is unique to each RFS. An RFS Configuration CD ships with the equipment. It provides an RFS script and instructions for selecting the correct value to match the specific RFS that is physically installed with the BTS. The imaginary element of the calibrator board that is found in the RFS. This information captures the loss &
amplitude information of the board. The Power Splitter data is unique to each RFS. An RFS Configuration CD ships with the equipment. It provides an RFS script and instructions for selecting the correct value to match the specific RFS that is physically installed with the BTS. The Transmit gains for each antenna element, ranging from 0-255, with 0 being the lowest gain. This data is returned as a result of full calibration. The Receive gains for each antenna element, ranging from 0-255, with 0 being the lowest gain. This data is returned as a result of full calibration. Layer 1 - w0 Table Values Field Name Sub Carrier Id Antenna Index W0 Weight_I W0 Weight_Q 1-5 1-8 Description The number (ordinal) of the subcarrier pair. The number of the antenna element. Real elements of the vector used to control ACC spatial pattern. Imaginary elements of the vector used to control ACC spatial pattern. 228 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Layer 1 - Calibration Table Values Field Name Sub Carrier Id Antenna Index Tx Weight_I Tx Weight_Q Rx Weight_I Rx Weight_Q 1-10 1-8 Description The number (ordinal) of the subcarrier. The number of the antenna element. Real elements of the vector used while transmitting to control ACC spatial pattern. This data is returned as a result of any of the calibration modes. Imaginary elements of the vector used while transmitting to control ACC spatial pattern. This data is returned as a result of any of the calibration modes. Real elements of the vector used during Receive to control ACC spatial pattern. This data is returned as a result of any of the calibration modes. Imaginary elements of the vector used during Receive to control ACC spatial pattern. This data is returned as a result of any of the calibration modes. Layer 2 - Carrier Data Field Name Sub Carrier Number
/ Sub Carrier Access Channel Values 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8, 9-10 Checkmark or blank Broadcast Channel Checkmark or blank TDD Symmetry Ratio Symmetric or Asymmetric Repeat Uplink Pkts Checkmark or blank Frequency
(Scroll Bar) 2.305 GHz - 2.359 GHz 2.40 GHz - 2.473 GHz 2.50 GHz - 2.595 GHz 2.602 - 2.686 GHz Description These two fields identify the 10 subcarriers. You can click on the pair of subcarriers to be enabled for this BTS. Subcarriers are assigned in pairs. Access Code Channels: The ACC Channel occupies the Code Channel with Walsh Index 0 configured on a specified subcarrier frequency. Each checkbox indicates which pair of subcarriers contains an Access Channel. Broadcast Code Channel (BCC): If the box is checked, then a BCC will be transmitted in each pair of subcarriers that already contains an ACC. The BCCs are used to broadcast software upgrades to the Modems. Symmetric Ratio is 1:1. Asymmetric Ratio is 1:3. This parameter determines the variable uplink and downlink ratio in a TDD frame. If set to Asymmetric, the downlink will have 3 times more bandwidth than the uplink. This is sometimes desired due to the types of users on the system, i.e., downloading files off the Internet. If the box is checked, the Modems will repeat uplink packets. Indicates the center frequency of the BTS transmit signal. Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 229 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Layer 2 - Bandwidth Field Name Underload Threshold
(%) Values 80%
Overload Threshold (%) 85%
Positive Access Overload Threshold (%) Negative Access Overload Threshold (%) Reserved Channels for Accesses CPE Inactive Time (min) Bandwidth Adjust Interval (10ms) Realtime Session Hold Time (10ms) Non-realtime Session Hold Time (10ms) 90%
95%
12 15 20 250 250 Non RT PreRelease BW
(Kbps) 0 - 2,048 Default is 32 Denied Req Number Average LCC Q LEN Factor Exponential For Average Average Burst Time (ms) Max Bts Power (TCC Power) DL ACC Power Per Channel (TCC Power) TCC Initial Setup Power
(%) Average Exponential Factor TCC Power per Channel Range (dB) Min Realtime Data Bandwidth (Kbps) 5 2 1 50 320 8 25%
1 19 0 - 2,048 Default is 32 Description The threshold crossing in which a BTS changes its load congestion state from Overload (either Positive Access Overload or Negative Access Overload) to Underload. The threshold crossing in which a BTS changes its load congestion state from Underload to Positive Access Overload. The threshold crossing in which a BTS changes its load congestion state from Negative Access Overload to Positive Access Overload. The threshold crossing in which a BTS changes its load congestion state from either Underload or Positive Access Overload. Number of channels reserved for access when in the Underload state. When a CPE has not communicated with a BTS for the set Inactive Time, the status of the CPE changes from active to inactive, as expressed in minutes. A users bandwidth (uplink or downlink) is adjusted every Adjust Time if needed when on TCC. Expressed in units of 10 milliseconds. The length of time a user with realtime data holds RF resources after the incoming packet queue is empty. Expressed in units of 10 milliseconds. The length of time a user with non-realtime data holds RF resources after the incoming packet queue is empty. Expressed in units of 10 milliseconds. The bandwidth a user is assigned while in Non-realtime Session Hold Time. The Non RT PreRelease BW is in units of MAC packets. The number of consecutive times a users access request fails due to lack of RF resources before access is denied. Factor used to determine the average LLC queue length. Average exponent for all statistical variables but power. Average time for a data burst, expressed in units of 10 milliseconds. Maximum RF power a BTS has. It is in units of maximum TCC power per channel. This field is not configurable. Downlink ACC RF power per channel. It is expressed in units of maximum TCC power per channel. Initial setup power of a TCC channel. Expressed in units of the percentage of the max. TCC power per channel. Average exponent for average power. Number of decibels the downlink TCC power per channel can vary. The minimum bandwidth a user with realtime data holds that is not used for acknowledgement. Expressed in units of MAC packets (data rate). continued 230 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Field Name Supported Modulations Total Priority Level Num. Max Bandwidth for Priority 1-8 (%) Values QAM4 QAM4 QAM8 QAM4 QAM16 QAM4 QAM8 QAM16 8 1 default 85%
2 default 10%
3 default 5%
4-8 default 0%
Description The highest QAM Rank the BTS can process. The total number of QoS classes the BTS can maintain. Each class is associated with a priority. The percentage of the total bandwidth a QoS class associated with a certain priority is entitled to. Layer 2 - WAN Congestion Control Field Name Average Queue Size Weight (%) Values 100.0 Max Queue Size (KB) 512 Min to Max Drop Probability (%) Realtime Min Drop Threshold (%) 10 100 High Priority Min Drop Threshold (%) 100 Low Priority Min Drop Threshold (%) 100 Description For downlink, this value - expressed as a percentage -
indicates how much the current queue size contributes to the calculation of the average queue size. The average queue size is used by the BTS Resource Management software to determine how many Code Channels to give a CPE. The greater the weight, the greater influence the current queue size has on the average queue size. The lower the weight, the more the queue size is an actual average of the current queue size over time. For downlink, the maximum queue size - in kilobytes -
for each priority queue (high, low, voice). Once the queue is full (at Min Drop Threshold) all packets are dropped. For downlink, the probability of a packet being dropped when the Min Threshold has been reached. The higher this number, the more likely a packet will be dropped between the Min Threshold and the Max Threshold. NOTE: All packets are dropped at the Max Threshold. For downlink, the minimum queue size in which voice priority packets are considered for being dropped. For example, if set to 10%, once the queue size reaches 11%
or more, voice priority packets may be dropped. The Max Drop Probability field determines if a packet is dropped once the Min Threshold is exceeded. For downlink, the minimum queue size in which high priority packets are considered for being dropped. For example, if set to 10%, once the queue size reaches 11%
or more, high priority packets may be dropped. The Max Drop Probability field determines if a packet is dropped once the Min Threshold is exceeded. For downlink, the minimum queue size in which low priority packets are considered for being dropped. For example, if set to 10%, once the queue size reaches 11%
or more, high priority packets may be dropped. The Max Drop Probability field determines if a packet is dropped once the Min Threshold is exceeded. Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 231 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Layer 2 - CPE Uplink Congestion Control Field Name Avg Queue Size Weight
(%) Values 100.0 Max Queue Size (KB) 512 Min to Max Drop Probability (%) Realtime Min Drop Threshold (%) 10 100 High Priority Min Drop Threshold (%) 100 Low Priority Min Drop Threshold (%) 100 Description For the uplink, this value - expressed as a percentage -
indicates how much the current queue size contributes to the calculation of average queue size. The average queue size is used by the BTS Resource Management software to determine how many Code Channels to give a CPE. The greater the weight, the greater influence the current queue size has on the average queue size. The lower the weight, the more the average queue size is an actual average of the current queue size over time. For the uplink, the maximum queue size for each priority queue (high, low, voice). Once the queue is full (at Min Drop Threshold) all packets are dropped. For the uplink, the probability of a packet being dropped when the Min threshold has been reached. The higher this number, the more likely a packet will be dropped between the Min Threshold and Max Threshold. Note:
All packets are dropped at the Max Threshold. For the uplink, the minimum queue size in which voice priority packets are considered for being dropped. For example, if set to 10% once the queue size reaches 11%
or more, voice priority packets may be dropped. The Max Drop Probability field determines if a packet is dropped once the Min Threshold is exceeded. For the uplink, the minimum queue size in which high priority packets are considered for being dropped. For example, if set to 10% once the queue size reaches 11%
or more, high priority packets may be dropped. The Max Drop Probability field determines if a packet is dropped once the Min Threshold is exceeded. For the uplink, the minimum queue size in which low priority packets are considered for being dropped. For example, if set to 10% once the queue size reaches 11%
or more, low priority packets may be dropped. The Max Drop Probability field determines if a packet is dropped once the Min Threshold is exceeded. 232 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Backhaul Interface Parameters T1 Field Name Admin Status Values Up Line Type Send Code Signal Mode Line Length (foot) Fdl Line Status Change Trap Line Index Line Coding Circuit Identifier Transmit Clock Source Channelization ESF or D4 Send line code, Send No Code, Send Payload Code, Send Reset Code None 5000 None, Att54016, AnsiT1403 Enabled or Disabled 1 B8ZS or AMI Loop timing or Local Timing Disabled Description Up or Down. Display only. The administrative
(operational) status of this T1. If Down, no traffic is able to go through this interface. This field is not configurable. Framing format Selection of codes used for far-end loopback tests Always None Length of T1 cables from BTS to terminating equipment Facility Data Link (FDL) signaling type Enables generation of traps based on changes to the line status The ATM IF index that this T1 is associated with Type of coding used to encode bits on the line Vendors transmission circuit identifier Source of the framer Transmit clock Always Disabled (clear channel) IMA Groups Field Name Admin Status Symmetry Values Up Symmetric operation, Symmetric &
Asymmetric, or Asymmetric Min Num Rx Links Tx Ima Id 3 0 Description Up or Down. This is the administration (operational) status of the IMA group. If Down, no traffic is able to go through this interface. Three options for the relationship of the Transmit and Receive link throughput:
?? Symmetric operation - all links should be configured in both directions. Tx and Rx must both be active to use the disk.
?? Symmetric and Asymmetric operation - all links should be configured in both directions. Transmitting is allowed when Tx is active and Rx is not active.
?? Asymmetric operation - not required to configure the IMA links in both Tx and Rx directions. Minimum number of active Receive links that is necessary for the IMA group to be active. Near-end (Transmit) IMA ID. continued Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 233 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Field Name Alpha Value Gamma Value Values 2 1 Index IMA group 2 Min Num Tx Links 1 Ne Tx Clk Mode Tx Frame Length Beta Value ITC M128 2 Description Used to specify the number of consecutive valid ICP cells to be detected before moving to the IMA hunt state from the IMA sync state. Used to specify the number of consecutive valid ICP cells to be detected before moving to the IMA sync state from the IMA pre-sync state. IMA Group 1 or 2. Unique sequence number of the IMA group. Minimum number of Transmission links that have to be active for the IMA group to be active. Near-end Transmit clock mode. Length of IMA frame being transmitted. It is defined as M consecutive cells. Used to specify the number of consecutive ICP cells with errors to be detected before moving to the IMA hunt state from the IMA sync state. IMA Group IMA 1 IMA 2 Add T1s to IMA Groups T1s Associated With this IMA Group Notes Field Name If Index Max Vccs Max Active Vci Bits Values T1-1 (first T1 ID) 1001 9 Max Vpcs Max Active Vpi Bits 0 3 ATM Description Interface (IF) Index associated with this ATM interface. Maximum Virtual Channel Circuits for this interface. The number of bits for Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI). Determines the maximum VCI value allowed for this interface. The Max Value is calculated by 2^ (max active vci bits). Maximum Virtual Private Circuits for this interface. The number of bits for Virtual Private Identifier. Determines the maximum VPI value allowed for this interface. The max value is calculated by 2^ (max active vpi bits). 234 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide PVC Values Field Name if Index Vpi (start and end) Vci (start and end) Tr/Re Traffic Descr Indexes AAL5 CPCS Tx SDU Size (Byte) AAL5 CPCS Rx SDU Size (Byte) Admin Status T1-1 0 0 2 1528 1528 Up AAL Type AAL5 (1-5) AAL5 Encap Type LLC encapsulation Cast Type Conn Kind P2P PVC Description The ATM IF index that this PVC is associated with. Virtual Path Identifier. The VPI + VCI are in the cell header and identify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches. Virtual Channel Identifier. The VPI + VCI are in the cell header and identify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches. Index of the ATM Descriptor that applies to this PVC. The Transmit and Receive Descriptors are the same. The maximum AAL5 CPCS SDU size, in bytes, that is supported in the Transmit direction. The maximum AAL5 CPCS SDU size, in bytes, that is supported in the Receive direction. Up or Down. The administrative (operational) state of the PVC. If it is Down, this PVC may not be used for traffic. The type of ATM Adaptation Layer (AAL) used on this PVC: AAL1, AAL2, AAL3, AAL4, or AAL5. The type of data encapsulation used over the AAL5 SSCS layer. The connection topology type. The type of VCL. This is always PVC. Assign CPE to PVC Field Name PVC CPE Data Values T1-1-1-100 (example) 0 Description Identifies the PVC to be assigned to the specified CPE. CPE assigned to specified PVC. Denotes what type of PVC to assign. Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 235 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Global Parameters Configuration Form Company:__________________________________________________________ Your Name:______________________________________Date:______________ NOTE 1: Field Values in gray rows indicate data that ordinarily should not be changed or that is populated automatically by the system. NOTE 2: Default Field Values are underlined. ATM Descriptor Field Name Index Type Category Frame Discard Param1 - Param5 CBR Parameters:
PCR RTVBR Parameters:
PCR SCR MBS NRTVBR Parameters:
PCR SCR MBS ABR Parameters:
PCR MCR ICR RDF RIF CDF UBR Parameters:
PCR Values 0 NOCLPNOSCR, NOCLPSCR, CLPNOTAGGINGSCR, CLPTAGGINGSCR, CLPNOTAGGINGMCR, CLPTRANSPARENTNOSCR, CLPTRANSPARENTSCR, NOCLPTAGGINGNOSCR CBR, RTVBR, NRTVBR, ABR, UBR True 0 Description Identifier for this ATM Descriptor Type of ATM Category of this ATM (see parameters, below) True or False. If set to True, enables the ability to discard ATM frames. Described below Peak Cell Rate Peak Cell Rate Sustainable Cell Rate Maximum Burst Size Peak Cell Rate Sustainable Cell Rate Maximum Burst Size Peak Cell Rate Minimum Cell Rate Initial Cell Rate Rate Decrease Factor Rate Increase Factor Cutoff Decrease Factor Peak Cell Rate 236 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide CPE Descriptor Field Name Name Index Priority UL Max Bandwidth
(Kbps) UL Min Bandwidth
(Kbps) DL Max Bandwidth
(Kbps) DL Min Bandwidth
(Kbps) Values 1 (1-8) 0 0, 32, 64, 96, 128, 160, 192, 224, etc. 0, 32, 64, 96, 128, 160, 192, 224, etc. 0, 32, 64, 96, 128, 160, 192, 224, etc. 0, 32, 64, 96, 128, 160, 192, 224, etc. Avg Queue Size Weight
(%) 100.0 Max Queue Size (KB) Min to Max Drop Probability (%) Realtime Min Drop Threshold (% ) 512 10 100 High Priority Min Drop Threshold (%) 100 Description Name given to this CPE Descriptor. Unique index identifier for this CPE Descriptor. The priority that a CPE with this assigned Descriptor will receive from the BTS Resource Manager software when requesting RF resources. This field maps to the Layer 2 > Bandwidth Data component in the BTS. Maximum uplink bandwidth allowable for a CPE with this Descriptor. The maximum number of code channels allocated for a CPE is directly related to this field. Minimum uplink bandwidth allowable for a CPE. This field determines the number of code channels allocated when a CPE begins a data session. The larger this value, the more code channels allocated at session startup. Maximum downlink bandwidth allowable for a CPE. The maximum number of code channels allocated for a CPE is directly related to this field. Minimum downlink bandwidth allowable for a CPE. This field determines the number of code channels allocated when a CPE begins a data session. The larger this value, the more code channels allocated at session startup. How much the current queue size contributes to the calculation of average queue size. The average queue size is used by the BTS Resource Manager to determine how many resources (code channels) to give a CPE. The greater the weight, the greater influence the current queue size has on the average queue size. The lower the weight, the more the average queue size is an actual average of the current queue size over time. Maximum queue size for each priority queue (high, low, voice). Once full (Max Threshold) all packets are dropped. The probability of a packet being dropped when the Min Threshold has been reached. The higher this number, the more likely a packet will be dropped between the Min and Max Threshold. All packets are dropped at Max Threshold. The minimum queue size at which voice-priority packets are considered for being dropped. For example, if set to 10% once the queue size reaches 11% or more, voice priority packets may be dropped. The Max Threshold Probability field determines if a packet is dropped once the Min Threshold is exceeded. The minimum queue size at which high-priority packets are considered for being dropped. For example, if set to 10%, once the queue size reaches 11% or more, high priority packets may be dropped. The Max Threshold Probability field determines if a packet is dropped once the Min Threshold is exceeded. continued Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 237 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Field Name Low Priority Min Drop Threshold (%) Values 100 Description The minimum queue size at which low-priority packets are considered for being dropped. For example, if set to 10%, once the queue size reaches 11% or more, low priority packets may be dropped. The Max Threshold Probability field determines if a packet is dropped once the Min Threshold is exceeded. Field Name Code Point Values 0 Priority Low, High, Voice DiffServ Description Unique index (bit) to be mapped to a defined Differentiated Service. The code point is structured as follows:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
| DSCP | CU |
DSCP: Differentiated Services Code Point CU: Currently Unused The Type of Service (ToS) bits are included in the DSCP. Low, High, or Voice. This is the priority given to data packets associated with this Code Point/Service. The BTS processes data packets with Voice, then High priority before Low priority packets. Field Name Relay Config Enabled Values
(Checkbox) Free Address Low Agent Threshold Free Address High Agent Threshold Relay Config MaxDhcp Size Option 82 Tagging 80 100 1488
(Checkbox) Remote Id
(Checkbox) DHCP Relay Description Enable or Disable. Clicking on the checkbox enables the DHCP Relay feature. Enable or Disable. Clicking on the checkbox enables the inclusion of one or more of the following Relay Information sub-options. If checked (enabled), include the Modem EID as the Remote ID Relay Information sub-option. It will be formatted as a 6 octet string 0000<EID>. This format is often used in cable modem scenarios. continued 238 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Field Name Circuit Id Values
(Checkbox) VPN Id
(Checkbox) Subnet Selection/Addr
(Checkbox) DOCSIS Device/Class
(Checkbox) Description If checked (enabled), include the BTS ID as the Circuit ID Relay Information sub-option. It will be formatted as a 4-octet string <BTS ID>. This format is often used in cable modem scenarios. If checked (enabled), include the Modem EID as the VPN ID Relay Information sub-option. It will be formatted as a text string navini<EID>. This format is often used in DSL scenarios. If checked (enabled), include the specified Subnet Address as the Subnet Selection Relay Information sub-
option. If checked (enabled), include the specified DOCSIS Device Class as the DOCSIS Device Relay Information sub-option. ARP Proxy Field Name ARP Ingress Proxy Values
(Checkbox) ARP Egress Proxy
(Checkbox) Description If clicked, this enables the BTS to respond to ARP messages coming from the CPEs/Modems to the BTS. If clicked, this enables the BTS to respond to ARP messages coming from the network (backhaul) to the BTS on behalf of the CPEs/Modems. Layer 3 Filter Field Name Dynamic Acl Values
(Checkbox) Egress Broadcast Filter
(Checkbox) Description If clicked, this enables the Dynamic Access Control List. It provides the filtering rules for DHCP Relay - where a BTS configured with these capabilities may add learned addresses to the Modems Authenticated IP List (the Modems Ingress Filter). When BTSs and Modems are configured for this feature, any packet whose MAC address cannot be found in the current Modems Authenticated IP List will be discarded. If clicked, this enables configured BTSs to drop all Ethernet Broadcast packets. Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 239 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. CPE Configuration Data Form Company:__________________________________________________________ Your Name:______________________________________Date:______________ NOTE 1: Field Values in gray rows indicate data that ordinarily should not be changed or that is populated automatically by the system. NOTE 2: Default Field Values are underlined. Add CPE Field Name EID (hex) Values 0 Descriptor Name CPE Descriptor-1 Collect Perf Data True Nomadic Disabled Admin Status Active Description Equipment Identifier unique to each CPE. This value is determined during the manufacturing process and is displayed on the case of the CPE hardware, as well as entered and displayed as a hexadecimal number in this field. The name of the CPE Descriptor to be used with this CPE. The CPE Descriptor level affects Quality-of-
Service (QoS) for this CPEs data packets. True or False. Collect Performance Data. If True, this CPE sends performance metrics to the BTS at the set interval. The BTS then uploads the performance data to the EMS at set intervals. The interval setting for collection and upload from the BTS to the EMS is set in the Performance fields for the BTS. Enabled or Disabled. If Enabled, this CPE can access any BTS in the network that is defined in its Available Home BTS list at the bottom of the screen. When enabled, the Current Home BTS list is ignored. If disabled, this CPE can only access a BTS in its Available Home BTS list. Active or Suspended. If suspended, the CPE cannot access any BTS. A Service Provider may decide to make the CPE suspended due to late service payments, security concerns, etc., rather than deleting the CPE from the system database. 240 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Home BTS Field Name Available Home BTS Current Home BTS Values Description Add or Remove BTS Names. A list of available BTSs to include in the Current Home BTS list for this CPE. Add or Remove BTS Names. If Nomadic is disabled, these are the only BTSs this CPE can access. If Nomadic is enabled, this list is ignored. Layer 3 Field Name Ingress Acl Values
(Checkbox) Ingress Broadcast
(Checkbox) Description If checkbox is clicked on any incoming packet whose MAC address cannot be found in the current CPE Authenticated IP List will be discarded. If checkbox is clicked on any incoming MAC broadcast message will be discarded. DHCP Relay Field Name Free Address High Drop Policy Max Address Number Values Drop most recently leased or Drop least recently leased Drop most recently leased or Drop least recently leased Description Drop the most recently leased or least recently leased IP addresses Drop the most recently leased or least recently leased IP addresses IP Address Field Name Static Client IP Address 0.0.0.0 Values Hardware Address 0:0:0:0:0:0 Description Use static, rather than dynamic, IP addressing for this device. If static IP assignment is being made, add this IP address to the Ingress Filter Authenticated IP List. Otherwise, leave zeroes. Enter the Ethernet address of the host computer to which the CPE is connected and that corresponds to the above Client IP Address. Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 241 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. 242 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Appendix V: Base Station Calibration Verification Objective The objective of this procedure is to verify the transmit power and noise figure of the Base Station using a Modem. Test Equipment Required
?? Installed Base Station, powered on and calibrated
?? Navini Drive Test Box
?? PC with Beamforming Display tool installed
?? 4 Fixed Attenuators: two at 30 dB, two at 10 dB. Low power attenuator acceptable.
?? RF cables and adaptors (3 ft or more)
?? N type Terminator for GPS Test Procedure Step 1. If not already done, calibrate the Base Station. Verify a successful calibration by monitoring the console with caldebugon. Verify that the cal error equals zero. If cal errors are not zero, troubleshoot the system before starting. Step 2. Prepare the setup that is shown in Figure V1. Step 3. Connect approximately 30-40 dB of attenuation to one end of the calibration cable. Connect a 3-6 ft RF cable to the other end of the attenuation. Connect 40 dB of attenuation to the end of that cable. Connect the attenuators to the Navini Drive Test box. Step 4. Put the Drive Test box as far away from the Base Station as possible. Terminate the GPS connector. Calculate the path loss from the Drive Test box to the Cal cable. In the EMS disable carriers 1-2, 3-4, and 9-10, leaving 5-6 and 7-8 enabled. Also verify that the ACC for 5-6 is selected. This is found by clicking on the BTS tab, highlighting the specific BTS, then selecting Air Interface > Layer 2 >
Carrier data. Refer to Figure V2. Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 243 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Figure V1: Test Setup Attenuation Attenuation
-40 dB
-40 dB Cal Cable Cal Cable 40 40 dB dB RF RF Cables Cables Turn Turn on on one one PA PA at a at a time time A A A B B B C C C D D D E E E F F F G G G H H H I I I J J J K K K L L L EMS EMS Server Server Internet Internet Internet Switch Switch EMS Client (CAM) EMS Client (CAM) Attenuation Attenuation
-30 to -40 dB
-30 to -40 dB GPS GPS antenna antenna port port Cable Cable Cable Cable Loss Cable Loss Cable Loss Mid Mid Mid
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 cal cal cal Low Low Low
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0 Insertion loss thru cal cable and RFS Insertion loss thru cal cable and RFS Insertion loss thru cal cable and RFS 2 5 2 5 2 5 2 6 Cable and RFS performance 2 6 Cable and RFS performance 2 6 Cable and RFS performance 2 7 2 7 2 7 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 9 2 9 2 9 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 5 3 5 3 5 3 6 3 6 3 6 3 7 3 7 3 7 3 8 3 8 3 8 3 9 3 9 3 9 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 7 4 7 4 7 4 8 4 8 4 8 4 9 4 9 4 9 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 2 5 2 5 2 5 3 5 3 5 3 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 7 5 7 5 7 5 8 5 8 5 8 5 9 5 9 5 9 6 0 6 0 6 0 6 4 6 4 6 4 TX path TX path TX path RX path RX path RX path TX path TX path TX path RX path RX path RX path TX path TX path TX path RX path RX path RX path TX path TX path TX path RX path RX path RX path TX path TX path TX path RX path RX path RX path TX path TX path TX path RX path RX path RX path TX path TX path TX path RX path RX path RX path TX path TX path TX path RX path RX path RX path Low Low Low
- 4 0 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 1 8 . 0 C C C A A A B B B 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 Receiver performance Receiver performance Receiver performance High High High
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0
- 6 . 0 Mid Mid Mid
-40.0
-40.0
-40.0
-18.0
-18.0
-18.0
-40.0
-40.0
-40.0
-18.0
-18.0
-18.0
-40.0
-40.0
-40.0
-18.0
-18.0
-18.0
-40.0
-40.0
-40.0
-18.0
-18.0
-18.0
-40.0
-40.0
-40.0
-18.0
-18.0
-18.0
-40.0
-40.0
-40.0
-18.0
-18.0
-18.0
-40.0
-40.0
-40.0
-18.0
-18.0
-18.0
-40.0
-40.0
-40.0
-18.0
-18.0
-18.0 D D D Avg. loss Avg. loss Avg. loss
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0 H i g h H i g h H i g h
- 4 0 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 4 0 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 1 8 . 0
- 1 8 . 0 E E E Average Average Average Cal path loss Cal path loss Cal path loss
(calculated)
(calculated)
(calculated) LNA gain LNA gain LNA gain
(calculated)
(calculated)
(calculated)
-40.0
-40.0
-40.0
-18.0
-18.0
-18.0
-40.0
-40.0
-40.0
-18.0
-18.0
-18.0
-40.0
-40.0
-40.0
-18.0
-18.0
-18.0
-40.0
-40.0
-40.0
-18.0
-18.0
-18.0
-40.0
-40.0
-40.0
-18.0
-18.0
-18.0
-40.0
-40.0
-40.0
-18.0
-18.0
-18.0
-40.0
-40.0
-40.0
-18.0
-18.0
-18.0
-40.0
-40.0
-40.0
-18.0
-18.0
-18.0 F F F
-31.0
-31.0
-31.0
-31.0
-31.0
-31.0
-31.0
-31.0
-31.0
-31.0
-31.0
-31.0
-31.0
-31.0
-31.0
-31.0
-31.0
-31.0
-31.0
-31.0
-31.0
-31.0
-31.0
-31.0 G G G H H H I I I 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 J J J 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 K K K 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 L L L 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 8 6 8 6 8 6 9 6 9 6 9 7 0 7 0 7 0 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 2 7 2 7 2 7 3 7 3 7 3 7 4 7 4 7 4 7 5 7 5 7 5 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 9 7 9 7 9 8 0 8 0 8 0 8 1 8 1 8 1 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 3 8 3 8 3 8 4 8 4 8 4 8 5 8 5 8 5 8 6 8 6 8 6 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 9 8 9 8 9 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 1 9 1 9 1 9 2 9 2 9 2 9 3 9 3 9 3 9 4 9 4 9 4 Power Power Power splitter loss splitter loss splitter loss UL Tcc Power UL Tcc Power UL Tcc Power UL SNR UL SNR UL SNR Absolute Signal Absolute Signal Absolute Signal strength strength strength N o i s e L e v e l N o i s e L e v e l N o i s e L e v e l Noise Figure Noise Figure Noise Figure 0 . 0 3 1 6 0 . 0 3 1 6 0 . 0 3 1 6 0 . 0 3 1 6 0 . 0 3 1 6 0 . 0 3 1 6 0 . 0 3 1 6 0 . 0 3 1 6 0 . 0 3 1 6 0 . 0 3 1 6 0 . 0 3 1 6 0 . 0 3 1 6 0 . 0 3 1 6 0 . 0 3 1 6 0 . 0 3 1 6 0 . 0 3 1 6 0 . 0 3 1 6 0 . 0 3 1 6 0 . 0 3 1 6 0 . 0 3 1 6 0 . 0 3 1 6 0 . 0 3 1 6 0 . 0 3 1 6 0 . 0 3 1 6
- 8 . 0 0
- 8 . 0 0
- 8 . 0 0
- 8 . 0 0
- 8 . 0 0
- 8 . 0 0
- 8 . 0 0
- 8 . 0 0
- 8 . 0 0
- 8 . 0 0
- 8 . 0 0
- 8 . 0 0
- 8 . 0 0
- 8 . 0 0
- 8 . 0 0
- 8 . 0 0
- 8 . 0 0
- 8 . 0 0
- 8 . 0 0
- 8 . 0 0
- 8 . 0 0
- 8 . 0 0
- 8 . 0 0
- 8 . 0 0 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00
-114.05
-114.05
-114.05
-114.05
-114.05
-114.05
-114.05
-114.05
-114.05
-114.05
-114.05
-114.05
-114.05
-114.05
-114.05
-114.05
-114.05
-114.05
-114.05
-114.05
-114.05
-114.05
-114.05
-114.05
-126.05
-126.05
-126.05
-126.05
-126.05
-126.05
-126.05
-126.05
-126.05
-126.05
-126.05
-126.05
-126.05
-126.05
-126.05
-126.05
-126.05
-126.05
-126.05
-126.05
-126.05
-126.05
-126.05
-126.05 5.95 5.95 5.95 5.95 5.95 5.95 5.95 5.95 5.95 5.95 5.95 5.95 5.95 5.95 5.95 5.95 5.95 5.95 5.95 5.95 5.95 5.95 5.95 5.95 Transmitter Performance Transmitter Performance Transmitter Performance Absolute Absolute Absolute Sync Level Sync Level Sync Level
-80.0
-80.0
-80.0
-80.0
-80.0
-80.0
-80.0
-80.0
-80.0
-80.0
-80.0
-80.0
-80.0
-80.0
-80.0
-80.0
-80.0
-80.0
-80.0
-80.0
-80.0
-80.0
-80.0
-80.0 Power Power Power deviation deviation deviation P out Transceiver P out Transceiver P out Transceiver Power Power Power
(RMS)
(RMS)
(RMS) Power Power Power
(peak)
(peak)
(peak) Power at Power at Power at antenna antenna antenna
(RMS)
(RMS)
(RMS) Radiated Radiated Radiated power power power
(RMS)
(RMS)
(RMS) TX Gain TX Gain TX Gain
(DAC
(DAC
(DAC word) word) word) 45.49 45.49 45.49 45.49 45.49 45.49 45.49 45.49 45.49 45.49 45.49 45.49 45.49 45.49 45.49 45.49 45.49 45.49 45.49 45.49 45.49 45.49 45.49 45.49 36.0 36.0 36.0 36.0 36.0 36.0 36.0 36.0 36.0 36.0 36.0 36.0 36.0 36.0 36.0 36.0 36.0 36.0 36.0 36.0 36.0 36.0 36.0 36.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 48.0 48.0 48.0 48.0 48.0 48.0 48.0 48.0 48.0 48.0 48.0 48.0 48.0 48.0 48.0 48.0 48.0 48.0 48.0 48.0 48.0 48.0 48.0 48.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 Spreadsheet Spreadsheet M M M RX Gain RX Gain RX Gain
( D A C
( D A C
( D A C word) word) word) 145 145 145 145 145 145 145 145 145 145 145 145 145 145 145 145 145 145 145 145 145 145 145 145 Beamforming Beamforming Display Display Laptop creating Laptop creating traffic through traffic through FTP or pinging FTP or pinging continuously continuously GPS GPS
(not used)
(not used) Drive Test Drive Test Tool Tool AC power AC power DC power (cigarette lighter) DC power (cigarette lighter) NOTE: The EMS Client (CAM) and the Beamforming Display may be run from the same laptop Figure V2: Configure Carrier Data Window 244 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Step 5. Connect approximately 20-40 dB of attenuation to the end of the calibration cable. Connect a 3-6 ft RF cable to the other end of the attenuation. Connect the remaining attenuation to the end of that cable. Connect the attenuators to the Navini Drive Test box. Step 6. Put the Drive Test box as far away from the Base Station as possible. Terminate the GPS connector. Calculate the path loss from the Drive Test box to the Cal cable. In the EMS disable carriers 1-2, 3-4, and 9-10, leaving 5-6 and 7-8 enabled. Also verify that the ACC for 5-6 is selected. This is found by clicking on the BTS tab, highlighting the specific BTS, then selecting Air Interface > Layer 2 >
Carrier data. Refer to Figure V2. Step 7. Disable all PAs except PA #1. Step 8. From the Beamforming, verify that the Receive Sync from the Drive Test Tool is approximately 80 dBm. If not, adjust the value of the attenuators accordingly. Step 9. Start an upload of a large file or ping continuously with packets 3,000 bytes or greater. You need to acquire at least 20 code channels in one sub-carrier. If the number of code channels is less than 20, start an additional ping sessions. ping <ip_address> l 3200 t Step 10. Capture the following parameters from the BTS Beam-forming display. Refer to Figure V3:
Downlink: SYNC Recv Sgl Strength (dBm) Uplink: SNR (dB) Uplink: TCC Recv Sgl Strength (dBm) Step 11. Capture the same parameters as in Step 10 for each of the remaining PAs, one by one. That is, with PA #2 turned on and all other PAs turned off ; then with PA #3 turned on and all other PAs turned off; etc. Step 12. Use the spreadsheet and input all the captured parameters to calculate the Tx power and Noise figure. Step 13. Measure and record attenuation value. Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 245 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Figure V3: BTS Beamforming Display Window Number of channels Number of channels Number of channels Number of channels assigned to TCC assigned to TCC assigned to TCC assigned to TCC SYNC Recv Sgl Strength (dBm) SYNC Recv Sgl Strength (dBm) SYNC Recv Sgl Strength (dBm) SYNC Recv Sgl Strength (dBm) SNR (dB) SNR (dB) SNR (dB) SNR (dB) TCC Recv Sgl Strength (dBm) TCC Recv Sgl Strength (dBm) TCC Recv Sgl Strength (dBm) TCC Recv Sgl Strength (dBm) Other Parameters to Capture The following parameters should also be captured:
?? Calibration Sensitivity (set in EMS)
?? Path Loss (to be measured)
?? Cal Cable Loss (set in EMS)
?? Power Splitter Loss (set in EMS) 246 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Results Using the Base Station Calibration Verification form (Figure V4), submit your results to Navini Networks for evaluation and sign-off. Figure V4: Base Station Calibration Verification Form C D E F G H I Data input by user 9/28/2003
-6.0 70.0
-76.0
-90.0 30.0 18.0 A B 1 2 General information 3 4 Date 5 Site Name 6 BTS ID Frequency (MHz) 7 8 Software release 9 Personnel 10 11 12 Cal cable loss 13 Attenuation 14 15 RX sensitivity (set in EMS) 16 Antenna power (in EMS) 17 Antenna gain 18 19 20 21 22 23 Total Path loss A B C D E F G H I J K L Cable Cable Loss 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cal Mid
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0 Low
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0 Insertion loss thru cal cable and RFS 25 26 Cable and RFS performance 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 TX path RX path TX path RX path TX path RX path TX path RX path TX path RX path TX path RX path TX path RX path TX path RX path Low
-40.0
-18.0
-40.0
-18.0
-40.0
-18.0
-40.0
-18.0
-40.0
-18.0
-40.0
-18.0
-40.0
-18.0
-40.0
-18.0 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 High
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0 Mid
-40.0
-18.0
-40.0
-18.0
-40.0
-18.0
-40.0
-18.0
-40.0
-18.0
-40.0
-18.0
-40.0
-18.0
-40.0
-18.0 Avg. loss
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0 High
-40.0
-18.0
-40.0
-18.0
-40.0
-18.0
-40.0
-18.0
-40.0
-18.0
-40.0
-18.0
-40.0
-18.0
-40.0
-18.0 Average Cal path loss
(calculated) LNA gain
(calculated)
-40.0
-18.0
-40.0
-18.0
-40.0
-18.0
-40.0
-18.0
-40.0
-18.0
-40.0
-18.0
-40.0
-18.0
-40.0
-18.0
-31.0
-31.0
-31.0
-31.0
-31.0
-31.0
-31.0
-31.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 247 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. A B C D E F G H I J K L M UL Tcc Power 64 65 Receiver performance 66 Power splitter loss 0.0316 0.0316 0.0316 0.0316 0.0316 0.0316 0.0316 0.0316 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 Transmitter Performance 81 82
-8.00
-8.00
-8.00
-8.00
-8.00
-8.00
-8.00
-8.00 P out Transceiver Absolute Sync Level Power
(RMS) Power
(peak)
-80.0
-80.0
-80.0
-80.0
-80.0
-80.0
-80.0
-80.0 36.0 36.0 36.0 36.0 36.0 36.0 36.0 36.0 45.49 45.49 45.49 45.49 45.49 45.49 45.49 45.49 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 Power deviation 94 UL SNR Absolute Signal strength Noise Level Noise Figure 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00
-114.05
-114.05
-114.05
-114.05
-114.05
-114.05
-114.05
-114.05
-126.05
-126.05
-126.05
-126.05
-126.05
-126.05
-126.05
-126.05 5.95 5.95 5.95 5.95 5.95 5.95 5.95 5.95 RX Gain
(DAC word) 145 145 145 145 145 145 145 145 Power at antenna
(RMS) 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 Radiated power
(RMS) 48.0 48.0 48.0 48.0 48.0 48.0 48.0 48.0 TX Gain
(DAC word) 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 0.0 0.0 0.0 Test Form Instructions These instructions explain how and what to enter into the Base Station Calibration Verification spreadsheet, as well as define each cells function. The cells that need an entry are shown in green on the spreadsheet. This document and form are to be used in conjunction with the Base Station Installation & commissioning Guide P/N 40-00047-00. I. Section 1: General Information A. Date (D4) Excel will enter the current date. B. SITE NAME (D5) Enter site name or customer designation. Enter BTS identification number or customer description. Enter the system operating frequency that the customer has determined to use. Enter the release number of the software load being used. C. BTS ID (D6) D. Frequency (D7) E. Software Release (D8) F. Name (D9) Enter your name. G. Cal cable loss (D12) Excel will enter averaged value of calibration cable loss from cell E38. 248 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide H. Attenuation (D13) I. Total Path loss (D14) Enter the attenuation value inserted into calibration path. Excel will enter the calculated value of the total path loss. J. Receiver sensitivity (in EMS) (D15) Enter the same number entered in the EMS under Air Interface > Layer 1 > General tab > RX sensitivity. K. Antenna power (in EMS) (D16) Enter the same number entered in the EMS under Air Interface > Layer 1 > General tab > Antenna power. L. Antenna gain (D17) Enter gain value of antenna elements. II. Section 2: Cable and RFS performance A. Cable loss (B30-D38) Enter the values measured during the cable sweeps. Include the minus sign on all entries. Include jumpers and surge protectors. B. Insertion loss through cal cable and RFS (C44-E59) Enter values measured during the RF sweeps of the cables and the RFS. Include the minus sign for all entries. C. Cal path loss (calculated) (H44-H58) Calculated value based on absolute loss measured during RF sweeps. The measured cable loss for antenna 1 plus 3dB for inherent loss in RFS (internal cables and LNA loss) is subtracted from the measured TX path loss to give absolute calibration path loss. It is important to check this value to ensure that it does not exceed 45 dB. D. LNA gain (calculated) (J45-L59) Calculated value based on absolute loss measured during RF sweeps. The absolute value of the difference between TX path loss and RX path loss equals LNA gain for each antenna path. III. Section 3: Receiver Performance A. Power splitter loss (in EMS) (A69-A76) Before calibrating, the script must have been run to enter the decimal values of the calibration board loss for each path. Enter those same values here. B. UL TCC power (C69-C76) From Beamforming Display, enter the value from the "Tcc receive signal strength"
field. There should be only one carrier active. This is the relative power per code channel, referenced to RX sensitivity, of that carrier, being received by the Base Station. C. UL SNR (E69-E76) Enter the value from the Beamforming Display. This value can be found just above the TCC value in the same carrier column. D. Absolute Signal strength (G69-G76) Calculated signal strength of the receive signal converted to 5 MHz BW. TCC power per code channel is converted to absolute by adding RX sensitivity and then subtracting spreading gain. Multiple antenna gain is then added to show receive Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 249 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. signal strength at each antenna. (RX sensitivity + UL TCC power - 10*LOG10(320)
+ 9). E. Noise level (I69-I76) F. Noise Figure (K69-K76) Calculated digital noise floor of the system measured in a 5 MHz BW. Calculated by adding the spreading gain of the individual carriers back in and subtracting the thermal noise floor (KTB) in a 500 KHz BW. G. RX gain (DAC word) (M69-M76) The data word generated during calibration for the receiver gain DAC that controls the IF attenuator. It is found in the EMS under Air interface > Layer 1 > Show configuration > Antenna tab. IV. Section 4: Transmitter Performance A. Analyzer Readings (A90-B97) 1. Peak 2. RMS The peak amplitude of the sync signal measured on the spectrum analyzer. The measurement is taken with the spectrum analyzer in the time domain (0 Hz span) and RBW set for 5 MHz. Sweep time is typically between 10 and 20 ms. When taking the measurement, the sync signal will have peaks and valleys associated with it. Make sure to measure the absolute peak. This is a calculated value based on measurements taken on several occasions, comparing peak power to RMS power on a Rhode & Schwartz spectrum analyzer. It has been determined that the correction factor for peak to average on a standard spectrum analyzer is 9.5 dB. This correction factor is the default entry in this section. If it is possible to make the RMS measurement with the proper equipment then that is the preferred method. The calculation is very straightforward: peak power minus 9.5 dB = Power RMS. B. P out transceiver (D90-E97) Power peak and Power RMS are calculated values using the value from the spectrum analyzer readings and the value entered for coupler/test cable loss (Cell H31). C. Power at antenna (RMS) (G90-G97) Calculated value using the Output Power (Pout) of the transceivers and the Cable Loss plus the inherent loss of the RFS. D. Radiated Power (RMS) (I90-I97) Calculated value using Power at the antenna and the value entered for antenna gain
(Cell H32). E. TX Gain (DAC word) The hex data generated during calibration for the transmit gain DAC that controls the IF attenuator. This is found in the EMS under Air interface > Layer 1 > Show configuration > Antenna tab. F. Max power deviation across all antennae (E99, G99, I99) Calculated value showing the deviation between the lowest power antenna and the highest power antenna for each column. 250 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Appendix W: Local Modem Tests Objective Local Wired Modem Testing (then Over-The-Air Modem Testing) will verify that the Base Station is working and able to transmit and receive data. Data rates are not being checked at this time. Refer to Figure W1 when setting up and performing the Wired Modem procedures. Wired Modem Test Equipment Required
Modem PC - Laptop with CPE debug tool. Connect to CPE with an Ethernet cable Attenuator - 70dB fixed attenuation, plus 40 adjustable range with 1dB resolution
(cascade multiple attenuators) Shielding box - Need to provide 80 dB isolation. Shielding box may not be needed if the Modem cannot sync to BTS over-the-air at the test location.
Figure W1: Wired Modem Setup Calibration Calibration Calibration Calibration Calibration cable cable cable cable cable BTS BTS BTS BTS BTS Attenuator Attenuator Attenuator Attenuator Attenuator CPE Modem CPE Modem Modem PC PC PC PC PC Shielding box Shielding box Shielding box Shielding box Shielding box Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 251 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Equipment Settings Part of the Test Procedures below. Test Procedure Setup Set up the test procedures, per the following. Step 1. Calibrate the BTS and perform the Calibration Verification procedure. Connect the Modem and the attenuators. The combined attenuation should be set roughly as follows:
Total attenuation = PTX - 30 + 18 Cal cable loss + 80 Where PTX is the Tx output power at antenna input port that is set in EMS during calibration. Cal cable loss is the loss of the calibration cable. The total attenuation should be partitioned between fixed and adjustable attenuators in such a way that the adjustable attenuator is set to about 10 dB. Disconnect the calibration cable from the back of the BTS shelf and connect it to the attenuator as shown in the drawing Ping the BTS continuously from the Modem. Check the sync level at the CPE debug tool. The level should be about 80 dBm. Test Procedure - Check Modem Sensitivity & Output Power Follow the steps in the procedure below. Step 1. Record the downlink TCC power level and SNR reading on the CPE debug tool. Step 2. Calculate the effective noise floor: NF= SNRTCC LevelTCC. Where SNRTCC is the TCC SNR and LevelTCC is the received downlink TCC level. NF should be close to 127 5. Step 3. Check Modem output power cap difference. It should be greater than 0. Step 4. Increase the attenuation by 10 dB (increase the attenuation of the adjustable attenuator). Step 5. Measure the effective noise floor and the output power cap difference gain. Step 6. Increase the attenuation by another 10 dB and take the measurements again (if the link is broken when the attenuation increases 10 dB, back off the attenuation by 10 dB and then increase the attenuation with 1 dB steps until the link is broken. Then reduce the attenuation by 4 dB). 252 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Step 7. Calculate the maximum path allowed as follows:
Max loss = Attenuation total + Cal cable loss + 30 Where Attenuation total is the total attenuation of all attenuators (fixed + adjustable). Test Procedure - Check BTS Sensitivity (Individual Antenna) Step 1. Set the attenuation of the attenuator so the total attenuation is about PTX 30 Cal cable loss + 80. Step 2. Activate antenna #1 only. Step 3. Record the uplink TCC power level and SNR reading on the BTS debug tool. Step 4. Calculate the effective noise floor: NF = SNRTCC LevelTCC. Where SNRTCC is the TCC SNR and LevelTCC is the received downlink TCC level. NF should be close to: SNR BTS Sensitivity + 25 ?5. Where BTS sensitivity is the BTS sensitivity setting during calibration. Step 5. Record the Modem output power. Step 6. Increase the attenuation by 10 dB (increase the attenuation of the adjustable attenuator). Step 7. Measure BTS effective noise floor and Modem output power again. Step 8. Increase the attenuation by another 10 dB and take the measurements again (if the link is broken when the attenuation increases 10 dB, back off the attenuation by 10 dB and then increase the attenuation with 1 dB steps until the link is broken. Then reduce the attenuation by 4 dB. The same attenuation will be used for all antenna tests). Step 9. Calculate the maximum path allowed as follows:
Max loss = Attenuation total + Cal cable loss + 30 Where Attenuation total is the total attenuation of all attenuators (fixed + adjustable). Step 10. Repeat the steps for antennas 2 through 8. Step 11. Average the Modem output power over antennas 1 through 8 for each attenuation setting. Test Procedure - Check BTS Sensitivity (Antenna Array) Step 1. Set the initial attenuation the same as in the individual antenna testing procedure. Step 2. Activate all antennas. Step 3. Record the uplink TCC power level and SNR reading on BTS debug tool. Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 253 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Step 4. Calculate the effective noise floor: NF = SNRTCC LevelTCC. Where SNRTCC is the TCC SNR and LevelTCC is the received uplink TCC level. NF should be close to SNR BTS Sensitivity + 25 ?5. Where BTS sensitivity is the BTS sensitivity setting during calibration. Step 5. Record the CPE output power. Step 6. Increase the attenuation by 10 dB (increase the attenuation of the adjustable attenuator). Step 7. Measure BTS effective noise floor and Modem output power again. Step 8. Increase the attenuation by the same amount as in individual antenna tests and measure the BTS effective noise floor and Modem output power. Step 9. For each attenuation setting, the Modem output power should be 9 dB less compared to those (average) in individual antenna tests. Step 10. Increase the attenuation by another 18 dB. The link should be on. Step 11. Calculate the maximum path allowed as follows:
Max loss = Attenuation total + Cal cable loss + 30 Where Attenuation total is the total attenuation of all attenuators (fixed + adjustable). Test Procedure - Data Rate Step 1. Set the attenuation of the attenuator so the total attenuation is about PTX 30 +18 Cal cable loss + 80. Step 2. Activate all antennas. Step 3. FTP a file with size greater than 10 Mbps from Modem to BTS (uplink). Step 4. Check the uplink data rate. It should be approximately 1 Mbps. Step 5. FTP a file with size greater than 20 Mbps from BTS to Modem (downlink). Step 6. Check the downlink data rate. It should be approximately 2 Mbps. After the test is completed, reconnect the calibration cable back to the BTS and run the calibration. The new calibration table should be the same as before (the changes in Tx and Rx AGC should be within 2 bits). 254 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Over-The-Air Modem Test Equipment Required Same as for Wired Modem Test. Equipment Settings Included in the Test Procedure. Test Procedure To set up a Modem for local over-the-air testing, follow the steps below. Step 1. Connect a Modem to a test computer. Reference the Ripwave Modem User Guide, P/N 40-00026-00 for Modem setup procedures. The location of the test computer setup needs to be close to the Base Station, within its coverage range. Step 2. Ensure that the Modem is registered in the EMS. Refer to Ripwave Configuration Guide for Modem registration procedures. Step 3. Using FTP software, transfer a 2 Mb file over-the-air from the test computer to the BTS. This is a system uplink transfer. Step 4. Using FTP software, transfer a 10 Mb file over-the-air from the BTS to the test computer. This is a system downlink transfer. Step 5. Ensure that both files transferred during testing. Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 255 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. 256 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Appendix X: Drive Study Overview The Drive Study is performed to confirm Base Station coverage. It is used to validate that the Base Station can be seen by a Modem throughout its predicted coverage area. The RF coverage analysis displays areas of coverage from good to bad by the use of color-
coding. An RF coverage analysis and its legend may be seen in Figure X1. The legend on the left displays the decibel strength for a given area, with red designating good coverage and white designating bad coverage. The RF coverage analysis is used to map out the Drive Study route
(Figure X2), along with geographic areas of concern. You should pay particular attention to null
(white) areas and the cell edges. Figure X1: RF Coverage Analysis Example Good coverage Good coverage Bad coverage Bad coverage coverage area coverage area Medium Medium area area area area Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 257 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Figure X2: Drive Study Route Example Equipment Required
?? Omni-directional antenna mounted outside vehicle
?? GPS with serial cable
?? Modem
?? Ethernet Cable
?? Modem power supply
?? DC to AC power converter
?? Laptop computer
?? Drive Study Form <shown later in this section>
Drive Test Procedure While driving you will collect statistics to validate the coverage plot. The application takes a reading every second and records the data in comma delimited file format. It is important to ensure that the GPS is on and that you can see the GPS coordinates in the application. Since the Ripwave system is not a mobile system, do not exceed 10 mph during the Drive Study. Going any faster will negate the adaptive beamforming, as the vehicle will not be in the exact position calculated by the Base Station. 258 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Step 1. Ensure that the Base Station has successfully completed calibration and RF sanity measurements at the frequency and TX/RX signal levels that were determined during the site survey. Ensure that the Base Station is powered on and able to TX/RX data. Step 2. Create a CPE Descriptor, and assign it to the Modems to be used for the Drive Study:
CPE Descriptor Parameters Name: Drive Study Index: Next available number Priority: 1 UpLink Max Bandwidth: 64 UpLink Min Bandwidth: 32 DownLink Max Bandwidth: 96 DownLink Min Bandwidth: 64 Other parameters: Use defaults. Step 3. Mount an omni-directional antenna on the roof of the vehicle. This will serve as the antenna for the Modem. Step 4. Bring the RF cable from the omni-directional antenna into the vehicle through the window. Attach the antenna to the antenna input of the Modem. The rotating upright antenna on the Modem needs to be removed to perform this step. You will also need to disconnect the patch antennas inside (Figure X3). Figure X3: Patch Antennas
<TO BE PROVIDED AT A LATER DATE>
Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 259 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Step 5. Connect the DC to AC power converter to the power port in the vehicle. Step 6. Step 7. Connect the Modem power supply to the Modem and to the DC to AC power If applicable, place the external antenna on the top of the vehicle. converter. Step 8. Connect the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port on the laptop computer and to the Ethernet port on the Modem. Step 9. Connect the GPS to the serial port on the laptop computer. Step 10. Optional: Connect the laptop power supply to the DC to AC power converter. (The laptop can be run off of its battery.) Step 11. Power on the GPS and the laptop computer. Step 12. On the laptop computer, start the Navini Networks Drive Study application. Step 13. Verify that the GPS location (latitude and longitude) and the GPS time are seen in the application. Step 14. Power on the Modem. Step 15. Enter a memo into the log file comment field of the Constellation Debugger about the route of the Drive Study being performed. When finished, click the log comment button. Step 16. Start driving along the Drive Study route determined during the RF coverage analysis. Do not exceed 10 - 15 mph. Step 17. When testing is completed, prepare the file(s) to be sent back to Navini for post-
processing and analysis. 260 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Drive Study Form Navini Networks Drive Test Check list Specify the following items before the drive test Drive test area name Date of Drive Test Drive Tester Name Standard Vehicle Name and Type CPE EID Frequency Band (ISM, MMDS) CPE test device RF cable loss (dB) CPE Test device Antenna gain (calibrated) Drive Route (Map attached) Drive test file name BTS Transmit Power Fill the site configuration BTS ID BTS antenna height BTS antenna Omni/Patch Mounted on the top or side Antenna Azimuth Antenna downtilt Drive Test Route Plan High Density Urban Covered Commercial/Industrial Residential with Trees Residential with Few Trees Paved Areas Grass/Agriculture Open Area Forested Areas Water Airports Others Things to pay attention to:
1. Make sure that the GPS data on the constellation debugger is updating all the time during the drive test. 2. Make sure that the antenna only selects the omni port all the time. 3. Make sure that the CPE is locked to the correct BTS by checking the BTS ID and frequency. 4. Make sure that the RF connections are good all the time. Check this by observing the stability of the RF signal strength in the LOS loca.. 5. Please make proper log information in certain important locations. Typical Clutter Height Yes / No Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 261 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. 262 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Appendix Y: Location (FTP) Tests Introduction The Location, or FTP, Test is performed to check the Ripwave system operation through file transfers between the Base Station and the Modem. The test measures the data rate performance at various locations within the coverage area. Data throughput is measured by executing file transfers using the FTP protocol for both upstream and downstream links. A file server must be in place on the same subnet with the BTS to accurately perform the file transfer, and the CPE User computer must be loaded with an FTP Client. As the file transfer is running, a data file is captured by the Modem tool. Data rates are captured by the FTP program. Data is recorded in a spreadsheet format. The spreadsheet lists the location, GPS, and other information. As data rates are captured, the results are entered manually. An average SNR and sync RSSI can be read from the debug tool, and recorded, for quick comparison to the acceptable criteria (see Acceptable Criteria section of this appendix). For NLOS indoor locations, tests are performed both outside the building and inside, so that the obstruction loss for the building can be determined. Unless the customer can provide indoor access, all results will be LOS or Near NLOS. Planning the Locations Before the actual testing is conducted, you will need to select the locations for the testing to occur. The sites should meet specific criteria and include a mixture of the following environments:
?? High Power (A), low clutter; close in, residential
?? High Power (A), high clutter; close in, commercial
?? Medium Power (B), low clutter; mid-range, residential
?? Medium Power (B), high clutter; mid-range, commercial
?? Low Power (C), low clutter; distant, residential
?? Lower Power (C), high clutter; distant, commercial Where:
(A) High Power
(B) Medium Power = Sync Value between 70 dBm and 85 dBm
(C) Low Power
= Sync Value between 85 dBm, and 95 dBm
= Sync Value greater than 70 dBm Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 263 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. At least 5 test points for each type are attempted. This may be difficult, depending upon the actual deployment scenario. Results may yield a very large percentage in one of the categories. For selecting an even spread across a 120-degree sector for a panel antenna installation, divide the 120 degrees into 6 even slices of 20 degrees each. Then divide each slice into 2 Km segments. This spaces each location at an approximate even distance throughout the complete sector and yields 36 test sites. To select an even spread across a 360-degree cell for an omni antenna installation, divide the 360-degree cell into 12 even slices of 30 degrees each. Next, divide each slice into segments based on distance (1 Km or 2 Km, depending upon propagation). This will approximately space each location an even distance from each other throughout the complete cell, yielding approximately 48 test sites (based on a 4 Km cell radius). To do this, split the cell into 4 quadrants. Using the RF coverage analysis, select up to 16 locations per quadrant (Figure H1). Pay particular attention to null areas and the cell edges. At these locations you will perform a file transfer to measure the data rates available. The FTP/Location Test Tool program and the BTS Beamforming Display tool will be used to record RF parameters during each test. Figures Y1 and Y2 provide examples of simple guidelines for selecting an even spread across a cell area. Figure Y1: Example of a 3-sector Site 264 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide E E E F F F Figure Y2: Example of 120 of an Omni Site C C C D D D B B B A A A A6 A6 A6 A5 A5 A5 A4 A4 A4 A3 A3 A3 A2 A2 A2 A1 A1 A1 Acceptable Criteria In order to evaluate the test results, several criteria are reviewed. These criteria are valid for both LOS and NLOS measurements.
?? Processed Sync Signal Strength: For a given test location, 2 dB variation during FTP
?? Absolute Sync Signal Strength Processed Sync Signal Strength: not greater than 2 dB variation during FTP
?? SNR values consistent during the FTP for all carriers used:
a. QPSK:
b. 8 PSK:
c. QAM16:
at least 11 dB at least 14 dB at least 17 dB
?? UL and DL Packet Error Rates (PER) not greater than 1%. This will vary according to interference levels, but may not render the system inoperable.
?? Uplink Beamforming Gain: between 16 dB and 21 dB. Perform a comparison of UL and DL, Beamforming Gain differences should be not greater than 3 dB. Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 265 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc.
?? Modem Transmit Power < 25 dBm; BTS Transmit Power < 0 dBm per code channel with power control
?? Sync vs. Data Rate:
Absolute Sync (dBm)
(A) 55 to 70
(B) 70 to 85
(C) 85 to 95 UL Data Rate (Mbps) 0.6 to 1.0 0.5 to 1.0 0.10 to 0.5 DL Data Rate (Mbps) 1.5 to 2.0 1.2 to 2.0 0.3 to 1.0 Process The recommended process for performing the Location (FTP) tests is described below. First: Verify that a single Modem transmits and receives data at expected rates, as indicated previously. Second: Verify that multiple Modems simultaneously transmit and receive data at acceptable rates, and the parameters listed above are being met. NOTE: The exact number of Modems is determined by field conditions. The minimum is two. Third: Verify operation at the full range of the system*. Include LOS Location Tests at cell edges. The height of Modem and uplink and downlink data rates are recorded for each site. Data rates are to be compared with expected results, as seen in the last item (Sync vs. Data Rate) of Acceptance Criteria. For example:
*2.6 GHz :
*2.4 GHz:
Equipment Required
~12 Km
~ 3 Km
?? Laptop computer
?? GPS with serial cable
?? FTP/Location Test Tool application
?? BTS Beamforming diagnostic tool
?? Modem
?? Modem power supply
?? DC to AC power converter
?? Ethernet Cable 266 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Location (FTP) Test Procedure Two people are needed to perform this procedure. One will be in the car performing the location test, and the other will be at the Base Station checking the operation using the BTS Beamforming diagnostic tool. 1. Ensure that the Base Station has successfully completed calibration, RF sanity measurements, and the Drive Study at the frequency and TX/RX signal levels that were determined by the cell site survey. Also ensure that the Base Station is powered on and is able to transmit and receive data. 2. Connect the DC to AC power converter to the power port in the vehicle. 3. Connect the Modem power supply to the CPE and to the DC to AC power converter. 4. Connect the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port on the laptop computer and to the Ethernet port on the Modem. 5. Connect the GPS to the serial port on the laptop computer. 6. Drive to one of the locations selected on the RF coverage analysis. Stop and turn off the vehicle. 7. Power on the GPS, the Modem, and the laptop computer. Place the Modem on the roof of the vehicle. 8. Start the Navini Networks FTP/Location Test Tool program. 9. Verify that the Base Station is transmitting and that the Modem establishes sync and can communicate with the Base Station. Ping a device address on the network side of the Base Station, and verify that a reply is received. While monitoring the Constellation Debugger, position the Modem to reduce the difference between absolute sync and processed sync levels to 2 or less. 10. Enter a memo into the comment field about which link of the test is being performed. 11. Verify that the GPS input is seen in the application. 12. Put the location number/site identifier into the comment field of the Navini Networks Constellation Debugger, and press the Enter key. This will identify the site location. 13. On the EMS connected to the Base Station, start the BTS Beamforming diagnostic tool. 14. From the laptop computer with the Modem connected to it, start a downlink FTP file transfer. Record the results on the site page or in the log. 15. On the EMS connected to the Base Station, using the BTS Beamforming diagnostic tool verify the strength and direction of the beam during the file transfer. Record the results on the site page or in the log. 16. Repeat the file transfer three times, stopping and starting the Debugger and Beamforming tool for each transfer 17. Repeat steps 14-15, this time performing an uplink FTP transfer. Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 267 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. 18. When finished, remove the Modem from the roof and secure equipment for travel. 19. Drive to the next location selected on the RF coverage analysis. Stop, and turn off the vehicle. 20. Repeat steps 7 to 19 until all locations are tested. At this point send this data to the RF Engineers to analyze, or continue until each quadrant in the cell is complete. When you send the results depends upon the schedule or results from the file transfers. 268 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Location (FTP) Test Form The form for recording the Location (FTP) test results is an Excel spreadsheet. Shown in Table Y1, the actual column headers go across the top of the form, but are broken into two sections here for readability. Table Y1: Location (FTP) Test Form BTS ID Sector Distance Software Release FTP Data Rate CPE w/
Downlink Site name File name; CPE File name; BTS
(Km) LOS NLOS CPE ext
(Kbps) 0 0 0 288 FTP Data Rate Uplink
(Kbps) Absolute Sync (dB) Remarks Downlink Uplink 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 distance Km 1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0 s p b M e t a r a t a d Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 269 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. 270 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Appendix Z: Site Installation Close-out Documentation List of Documents When performing a Ripwave Base Station installation, a number of tasks and forms are completed during the process. The following is a list and a brief description of each of the closing documents that are either required or optional for completing the Customer Acceptance of the system once it is commissioned. If the item is designated as REQUIRED it must be sent back to Navini Technical Services. If a required document cannot be obtained, you must retain approval in advance from the Manager, Navini Technical Services. Site Candidate Evaluation Form. REQUIRED Drawings/pictures from site. _____ 1. Customer Contact List. REQUIRED (Project Manager & Customer) _____ 2. _____ 3. Drive Instructions & Map to location. REQUIRED _____ 4. Network Diagram. Optional. _____ 5. Antenna Power and Cable Selection REQUIRED _____ 6. Bill of Materials (BoM). REQUIRED This is a list of the physical materials and their associated quantities that are used to build the site. This list includes but is not limited to RF cable type and size, RF cable connectors, grounding, racks, power supplies, RF cable hangers, RFS mounts, and so forth. Excel Configuration Forms. REQUIRED These forms are created in Excel spreadsheets and used to plan the system configuration parameters that must be in place as part of the installation and commissioning of the system. The forms are filled out according to how the EMS, BTS, Modems, and Global Parameters are to be configured for this customer site. _____ 7. _____ 8. RF Plot REQUIRED _____ 9. _____ 10. Interference Data. Optional. Interference Analysis Report. REQUIRED if Interfere Data Collected (RF Planning) Above information is required before departing to site _____ 11. RFS System Test Form. REQUIRED This form contains the data that is captured during the RF sweeps on the Ripwave RFS antenna and RF cables. _____ 12. Base Station Installation Certification Form. REQUIRED This form represents the close of a key milestone, the physical installation of the BTS and RFS. It includes RFS antenna height, azimuth, downtilt, grounding, weatherproofing, and other information about the site. _____ 13. Export BTS Data. REQUIRED This is not a form that needs to be completed;
rather, it is data that is captured from the EMS once the Base Station and Modems have been provisioned. This step should be completed prior to the Drive Study, and then again prior to the Location (FTP) tests. Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 271 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. _____ 14. Export EMS Data. REQUIRED _____ 15. Export CpeDescriptors (all). Optional. _____ 16. Base Station Calibration Verification Form. REQUIRED Calibration Verification is sometimes referred to as the Sanity Test. The form contains the operational results of the Base Station transmit and receive tests after the physical installation has been completed and the BTS has been turned on. _____ 17. Drive Study Form & Data. REQUIRED Also referred to as Drive Test. The form contains results of driving the coverage area of the installed Base Station site and capturing sync data on a laptop. The information is provided to Navini Networks to help tune the RF coverage model. Need Data Constellation Display. _____ 18. RF Plot Tuned Model. REQUIRED _____ 19. Location (FTP) Test Form. REQUIRED This form contains data rate information that is captured during RF throughput testing. The data is captured at both the EMS and at the Modem location on a laptop. The number of points to capture is determined by Navini Networks and the customer. Need BTS Beamforming and Constellation Display. _____ 20. RMAs. REQUIRED if replaced cards from original shipment _____ 21. Backup of Customer Deployed EMS Server. REQUIRED List of Pictures The following is a list and description of the REQUIRED pictures that Navini Networks recommends capturing during the installation project. Additional pictures are acceptable. _____ 1. RFS antenna mounted on the tower or rooftop _____ 2. Weatherproofed connectors on the back of the RFS antenna Cable Bend radius on the tower to the RFS Jumper cable to RF main feeder connections weatherproofed RF cable strap ground kit installation in all places as required for installation. RF main feeder runs. Lower buss bar with lightning protectors (weatherproofed if outside the shelter) _____ 3. _____ 4. _____ 5. _____ 6. _____ 8. _____ 9. _____ 7. Main feeder to BTS jumper connections BTS jumper connections to BTS RFS antenna grounding connections _____ 10. BTS grounding connections at BTS and buss bar _____ 11. Power connections to the BTS 272 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide _____ 12. BTS split chassis cabling _____ 13. Ground connections to earth ground or building steel _____ 14. Tower or mount connections to ground Checklist This checklist should be completed and sent to Navini Networks along with the forms and data. Closeout Documents 1. Customer Contact List 2. Site Candidate Evaluation Form completed 3. Drive Instructions & Map 4. Network Diagram (optional) 5. Antenna Power & Cable Selection 6. Bill of Materials 7. Excel Configuration Forms 8. RF Plot 9. Interference Data (optional) 10. Interference Analysis Report 11. RFS System Test Form 12. Base Station Installation Certification Form 13. Exported BTS Data 14. Exported EMS Data 15. Exported CPE Descriptor Data (optional) 16. Base Station Calibration Verification Form 17. Drive Study Form & Data 18. RF Plot Tuned Model 19. Location (FTP) Test Form 20. RMAs 21. Backup from EMS Closeout Pictures 1. RFS mounted 2. Weatherproofed connectors on RFS 3. Cable Bend radius 4. Jumper cable to RF main feeder 5. Cable ground kits if needed 6. Shelter bus bar with lightning arrestors 7. Main feeder to BTS jumpers 8. BTS Jumpers to BTS 9. RFS grounded 10. BTS grounding at BTS/buss bar Completed Date Completed Date File Name File Name Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 273 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. 11. Power connected to BTS 12. Split chassis cabling 13. Ground connections to earth ground 14. Tower or mount connections to ground 274 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Appendix AA: Customer Acceptance Form Base Station Installation & Commissioning Services Customer Acceptance Form Customer Name:
Customers Authorized Representative:
Job Title:
Office Address:
Email Address:
Office Phone:
Cell Phone or Pager:
Site Name:
Site Description:
Site Physical Address:
INSTALLATION SECTION:
Date Installation Started:
Customer Acceptance By: _____________________ __________ COMMISSIONING SECTION:
Date Commissioning Started:
Customer Acceptance By: _____________________ ______________________________ TEST ACCEPTANCE SECTION:
Date Testing Started:
Customer Acceptance By: _____________________ Completed:
Title: ________________Date:
Completed:
_________ Title: ________________Date:
Completed:
________ ________ Title: ________________Date: ______________________________ Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 275 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Navini Networks, Inc. This Customer Acceptance Form is subject to and governed by all of the terms and conditions set forth in the Master Supply Agreement between the parties. The Customer acknowledges, understands and agrees that when its Authorized Representative signs-off the Test Acceptance Section of this Form, Customer has thoroughly inspected the installation and commissioning services, and Customers sign-off means that completion of on-site verification that the Equipment installed by Seller performs in accordance with the Acceptance Criteria set forth in the Master Supply Agreement between the parties. The completed Navini Networks Site Installation and Commissioning Documents referenced below and attached hereto are incorporated by reference into this Customer Acceptance Form for all purposes. Navini Networks Site Installation and Commissioning Documents (double-click on the box to check or de-select a checkmark when completing the form):
Site Candidate Evaluation Report Site Materials BoM Site Drawings Site Construction Specific Tests, as required Grounding System Test Results, Concrete Break Test Results, Tower Guy Tensioning Test Results, etc. Site Specific Digital Photographs, as Required RFS System Tests Base Station Installation Certification Base Station Calibration Verification Location (FTP) Tests Drive Studies Coverage Predictions Maps Soft Copies of Test Results, if Requested 276 Part #40-00047-00 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003
1 | Chapter 2a | Users Manual | 1.63 MiB | October 12 2003 |
Navini Networks, Inc. Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 2a Chapter 2: Installation Pre-installation As was shown in Figure 4, prior to installing the equipment a number of planning and acquisition activities take place. The installation itself takes only about 2 days. The I&C crew may or may not be involved with all the pre-installation activities. Of these, they are most likely to be involved in the Site Candidate Evaluation, the gathering of data for the Interference Analysis, and the Antenna Power & Cable Selection step of the process. Project Plan A Project Plan is a document that lays out the work to be done, the objectives of the project, the schedule, resources required, and so forth. If Navini is performing the I&C activities, a Project Manager is assigned. The Project Manager prepares the Project Plan and shares it with the Navini and customer teams. An example of a written Statement of Work (SOW), Responsibility Assignment Matrix (RAM), and Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) for installation and commissioning are provided in Appendices A, B, and C. These types of documents may be used in negotiating work between companies and contractor services. Coverage Prediction Map Early in the planning of deployment of Ripwave Base Station equipment, an RF Engineer will go through the process of studying the RF environment of the candidate sites that the customer has identified. Readings are taken and analyzed at each site in order to predict what range of coverage can be expected from installing a Base Station at the site. Coverage predictions account for both Base Station performance and Marketing objectives with the service itself. The customer accomplishes the latter as part of the decisions concerning site selection. Part #40-00047-02 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 41 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 2a Navini Networks, Inc. Site Candidate Evaluation Often Technicians will be very comfortable with either the networking side or the wireless side of the system, but not usually both. To evaluate a potential install site, a form helps ensure all aspects of the site have been considered. Information about the site is recorded on the form. Since each site is unique, the form helps to ensure nothing is taken for granted or assumed about the installation site for the Ripwave equipment. A copy of this form may be found in Appendix D. It includes places to capture the logistics of the site, tower or rooftop mount possibilities, GPS coordinates, type of antenna to be installed, whether or not an outdoor enclosure is provided, power availability, distance between connection points, ventilation, a place for drawings from every angle, etc. It is from this information that the site will be designed, then installed to plan. Interference Analysis As part of deploying a Ripwave Base Station, the Field Service Engineer must collect critical information from the site. The data is provided to the RF Engineering personnel, who can then evaluate the Radio Frequency (RF) conditions. The RF Engineer analyzes the data for existing interference from other sources, and takes that into account when creating the coverage prediction map. The RF Engineer, in turn, supplies to the Field Service Engineer at the site valuable data parameters and configuration information unique to each system and each site. In addition to coverage, though, the interference analysis also helps to predict the quality of service, the power requirements to get above the noise floor, and other expectations regarding the site. This study helps Navini and the customer decide which type of system (frequency) and antenna
(panel or omni) will provide the best results. To collect the data the on-site Technician or Field Engineer performs an Interference Sweep Procedure (Appendix E) and supplies that data to the RF Engineer(s). Refer to Appendix F for instructions on using the sweep tool. Site Selected & Designed After evaluating the potential sites and the coverage prediction, the customer must select the specific site where the Base Station is to be deployed. The site must be carefully blueprinted to prepare for equipment ordering and installation. Navini can supply specifications and drawings to help the customer design the site. Refer to Appendices G, H, I, J, and K for BTS Specifications, RFS Data Sheets, BTS Outdoor Enclosures Manufacturers, Rectifier/Battery Backup Manufacturers, and a sample Base Station drawing. Check all regulatory standards (refer to Chapter 1, Page 8 Regulatory Information) prior to installation. 42 Part #40-00047-02 Rev E v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 2a Network Architecture Plan The IP Networking community involved in the project, both from Navini and the customer, often work together to analyze and plan how the Ripwave system will be integrated into the customers network. Of course, they are looking for efficient operation of the system and seamless integration. They have to plan the traffic routing, IP addressing, protocol compatibility, and so forth. Antenna Power & Cable Selection The size and type of cable used to install the Base Station affect power loss and calibration range for the transmitter and receiver. It is at this point in the process that the specific cable manufacturer, type of cable, and cable size must be determined. A complete procedure and tool are explained in Appendix L. Refer, also, to Chapter 1, Page 8 Regulatory Information for FCC warning regarding RF, and UL and NEC/CEC information regarding cable length and connectors. All BTS and RF shelf Coax and Digital cables between the Digital and RF Shelves are 60 inches in length. Physical distance between Digital and RF Shelves will always be less than the cable length. Bill of Materials The customer has to generate the Bill of Materials (BoM) - the actual equipment order to be manufactured and shipped to the installation site. Navini can provide part numbers and ordering information, as well as recommendations and other details that will assist customers in the correct placement of orders. There is a sample Bill of Materials in Appendix M. Acquire Materials Once ordered, the customer ensures that everything required for installing the Base Station is secured and at the deployment site. Confirm Backhaul Connection, EMS Server & FTP Server, Input Power & Grounding at Site The Backhaul connection for the Ripwave Base Station consists of up to two (2) Ethernet cable connections with RJ-45 connectors for each BTS installed, OR, up to eight (8) T1 connections with RJ-48 connectors for each BTS. The quantity of each connection will depend on the site requirements. These connections need to be made available before installation begins. Refer to the Regulatory Information in Chapter 1, Page 8 regarding backhaul connections, power and grounding. Part #40-00047-02 Rev F v1.0 (1.20) October 9, 2003 43 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 2a Navini Networks, Inc. The customers EMS Server and FTP Server should be put into place prior to the installation crews arrival at site. If the customers EMS Server is not available until after installation begins, the crew can typically use a laptop to perform initial configuration. The FTP Server, however, must be in place in order to commission the Base Station and test its operation. Power Requirements for the Base Station Refer to Table 3 Technical Specifications and to the Regulatory Information found in Chapter 1, Page 8. The BTS must be connected to a power supply/rectifier that is UL listed to UL60950 or UL60950-1 and has a grounded SELV output; and it must be installed in accordance with NEC/CEC Articles 800/810/830. A UL listed disconnect device, such as a circuit breaker or fuse, must be installed between the power supply and the BTS chassis connections. Ground Requirements for the Base Station The Base Station requires an earth ground connection. This ground should exhibit a maximum of five (5) ohms across true ground. All power and ground conductors must be mechanically supported to avoid strain of the wires and connection points. Refer to the Regulatory Information in Chapter 1, Page 8. NOTE: The installation procedures, which begin next, follow the same order as shown in the High-level I&C Process Flowchart in Figure 2. 44 Part #40-00047-02 Rev E v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 2a Install Power & Grounding Check all regulatory standards (refer to Chapter 1, Page 8 Regulatory Information) prior to installation. System Ground Buss Bar & Surge Protectors The Base Station system ground buss bar and data/power cable surge protectors are mounted on the wall adjacent to the BTS rack or enclosure. They should be mounted per accepted telecom standards and procedures. Step 1. Mount the data/power cable surge protectors (Figure 10) with the label lines toward the RFS and the label BTS toward the BTS. Step 2. Apply a thin coat of anti-oxidant joint compound to both sides of the system ground buss bar to ensure proper connection between it and the surge protectors. Figure 10: Data/Power Cable Surge Protector (Not Needed in TTA BTS) To install the eight (8) antenna and one (1) cal cable surge protectors (Figure 11), and the one (1) or two (2) Global Positioning System (GPS) surge protectors (Figure 11) in the system ground buss bar, follow the steps below. 1. Install the rubber gasket into the groove in the surge protector. 2. Install the surge protector in the system ground buss bar with the surge side toward the antenna and the protected side toward the BTS. 3. Install the star washer and nut on the top of the surge protector. Torque the nut to 140-150 inch-pounds. 4. When finished, the mounted surge protectors in the buss bar will appear as in Figure 12. Part #40-00047-02 Rev F v1.0 (1.20) October 9, 2003 45 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 2a Figure 11: Surge Protectors PSX-ME PSX-ME PSX-ME PSX PSXPSX DGXZ+06NFNF-A DGXZ+06NFNF-A 3406.17.0012 3406.17.0009 3406.17.0012 3406.17.0012 3406.17.0009 3406.17.0009 From left to right: PolyPhaser surge protectors are used with the Combo Chassis and Split Chassis configurations (PSX-ME for the Cal and RF cables, at the antenna, PSX for the Cal and RF cables at the ground Buss Bar, and DGXZ+06NFNF-A for the GPS antenna cable at the ground Buss Bar. Huber+Suhner surge protectors are used with TTA configurations
(3406.17.0012 PSX for the Cal and GPS cables, and for the Ancillary Surge protection at the RFS; 3406.17.0009 for the Ancillary Surge protection at the ground Buss Bar). It is recommended the use of UL listed surge protectors. Figure 12: Surge Protectors in Buss Bar 46 Part #40-00047-02 Rev E v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 2a Antenna Ground Buss Bar You should install the Antenna Ground Buss Bar on the mounting structure per accepted telecom standards and procedures (Figure 13). The location is decided on during the site survey and should be close to the RFS. Two or more buss bars may be installed per system. Figure 13: Buss Bars System Ground Wiring A minimum #6 stranded, green-coated copper wire and grounding hardware are used for ground connections. Install the system ground as a single-point connection between the system ground buss bars, the data/power surge protector, the BTS chassis, the BTS mounting rack, and the RFS antenna. Connect the system ground to earth ground. Apply anti-oxidant joint compound to all connections (Figure 14). Tighten all connections until secure. Figure 14: Applying anti-oxidant joint compound Antenna Buss Bar Antenna Buss Bar BTS Buss Bar BTS Buss Bar Part #40-00047-02 Rev F v1.0 (1.20) October 9, 2003 47 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 2a Navini Networks, Inc. Install Cables All cable connections in the Combo and Split-Chassis configurations are made using standard RF coaxial cable. The Navini Networks minimum for cable connections from the GPS to the BTS is LMR 400, 3/8-inch coaxial cable. Other types of cable that are comparable may be used. These were determined under Antenna Power & Cable Selection (Appendix L) activities cited earlier. The TTA configuration uses a composite cable containing nine RG-6 or RG-11 individual strands to replace the 8 RF cables, the Cal cable and the Power/Data cable (the signal previously sent through the Power/Data cable is now sent through the center connector of the individual RG-6 or RG-11 strands). All Coaxial and Digital cables between the Digital and RF shelves are 60 inches in length. Physical distance between Digital and RF shelves will always be less than the cable length. Figure 15: Coaxial Cables. HELIAX HELIAX RG6 RG6 RG11 RG11 RG-6 Bundle RG-6 Bundle 48 Part #40-00047-02 Rev E v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 2a Cut Cables for the Combo and Split Chassis Configurations The cable run is determined during the site survey. Note that the length of the cables may need to be slightly different, depending on the position of the buss bar relative to the BTS.
Cut nine (9) pieces of cable for the main feeder cables to connect the nine RFS connectors to the surge protectors on the system ground buss bar. Leave enough extra length for the service loop below the RFS and for connection to the surge protectors.
Cut eight (8) pieces of cable for the jumper cables to connect the surge protectors on the system ground buss bar to the eight (8) RF input connectors on the back of the BTS. Leave enough extra cable length for service. Cut one (1) piece of cable for the jumper cable to connect the surge protector on the system ground buss bar to the CAL connector on the back of the BTS. Leave enough extra cable length for service. Cut a piece of LMR 400 cable to connect each of the GPS antennas to the surge protectors on the system ground buss bar. Leave enough extra cable length for service. The maximum length of the LMR 400 cable for the GPS antenna is 100 feet. Cut a piece of LMR 400 cable to connect the surge protectors on the system ground buss bar to each GPS connector on the back of the BTS. Leave enough extra cable length for service. If there is more than one BTS co-located in the installation, two GPS antennas can serve all BTSs in the installation. The cable from the GPS antenna (after it goes through the surge protector) is connected to the antenna input of the GPS distribution amplifier (Figure 16). The output ports of the GPS distribution amplifier are connected to the GPS inputs of the BTS. The GPS distribution amplifier is powered by the GPS antenna input. The drawing in Figure 17 depicts the placement of the shared GPS resources among three BTSs. Figure 16: GPS Distribution Amplifier Part #40-00047-02 Rev F v1.0 (1.20) October 9, 2003 49 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 2a Navini Networks, Inc. Figure 17: Depiction of GPS Distribution Amplifier GPS 1 GPS 2 Polyphaser Polyphaser Distribution Amp Distribution Amp SHELTER BTS 1 BTS 2 BTS 3 50 Part #40-00047-02 Rev E v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 2a Cut Bundle Cable for the TTA Configuration On the end that attaches to the antenna, the RG-6 or RG-11 bundle cable comes with a weatherized boot and nine the N-type Male connectors in place. Cut the cable to the proper length at the other end and attach the proper connectors. Figure 18 Bundle Cable, Weatherized Boot and End Connectors Cal Port Cal Port
(BTS back plane)
(BTS back plane) QMA QMA RFCs RFCs
(BTS front)
(BTS front) N-type N-type Part #40-00047-02 Rev F v1.0 (1.20) October 9, 2003 51 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 2a Navini Networks, Inc. Install Connectors on Cables Install connectors on both ends of each cable. For LMR 600 cables, install EZ-600 N-type male connectors. For LMR 400 cables, install EZ-400 N-type male connectors. Steps for installing both types of connectors can be found in Appendix N. For reference, Appendix L also provides a list of vendors who can make cables. The Cal and RF cables in the Combo and Split Chassis configuration have N-type male connectors at both ends. The Bundle Cable used with the TTA configuration has N-type male connectors at the antenna end, but the connectors used at the other end depend on the degree of lightning protection desired. Is only the built-in protection is used, the connectors at the BTS end are QMA male, but if the Ancillary surge protectors are used, the connectors at the BTS end of this cable are N-type male. Figure 19: Connectors. N-Type N-Type BNC BNC QMA QMA M M F F M M F F M M RG6 RG6 RG11 BNC RG11 BNC RJ45/RJ48 RJ45/RJ48 Front Front Back Back 52 Part #40-00047-02 Rev E v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 2a Sweep RF Cables Sweep each individual cable, the RFS (8) and CAL main feeder and jumper cables, to check for line loss. Follow the instructions for sweeping the cables provided in Appendix O entering the results in the RFS System Test Form. Check continuity of the data/power cable. When finished, cover the cable connectors for protection until they are connected to the RFS or GPS. Connectorize & Run Cables Connect all of the RF cables to the surge protectors in the system ground buss bar. An example of a buss bar connection is shown in Figure 14. Ensure that the proper cable is connected to the proper surge protector. Connect the power/data cable to its surge protector. Also connect all the jumper cables to the surge protectors that will attach to the BTS. Do not connect these cables to the BTS at this time. Torque all the cable connectors to the surge protectors on the system ground buss bar to 20-24 inch-pounds. Figure 20: Buss Bar Connections RF 1-4 RF 1-4 CAL CAL RF 5-8 RF 5-8 GPS 1 GPS2 GPS 1 GPS2 Route all of the cables RFS (8), CAL, DATA/POWER and GPS (1 or 2) - between the system ground buss bar and the RFS, and GPS mounting sites. If running the cables up a tower, use a hoisting grip to lift the cables. Part #40-00047-02 Rev F v1.0 (1.20) October 9, 2003 53 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 2a Figure 21: Cable Routing Omni Omni Panel Panel 3.5 GHz TTA Panel 3.5 GHz TTA Panel Data/Power*
Data/Power*
CAL CAL RF RF RF RF CAL Data/Power*
CAL Data/Power*
RF RF CAL CAL RF RF
* In the TTA configurations, the Data/Power cable is no longer required
* In the TTA configurations, the Data/Power cable is no longer required 54 Part #40-00047-02 Rev E v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003
1 | Chapter 2b | Users Manual | 1.31 MiB | October 12 2003 |
Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 2b Install the BTS Check all regulatory standards (refer to Chapter 1, Page 8 Regulatory Information) prior to installation. Install Mounting Rack or Enclosure The BTS mounting rack (Figure 22) or enclosure is to be installed in compliance with applicable portions of the National Electrical Code (NEC), articles 800 and 810. You will need to adhere to local installation standards, as well as Navini Networks standards and procedures. Refer to Appendix I for manufacturers of outdoor BTS enclosures. Figure 22: BTS Mounting Racks Combo Chassis Combo Chassis Split Chassis Split Chassis TTA Chassis TTA Chassis Part #40-00047-03 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 55 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 2b Navini Networks, Inc. Install Chassis There are three types of BTS chassis: Combo, Split and TTA (Figure 23). Prior to Ripwave Release 1.19 (2.4 GHz systems), only the Combo Chassis was used, but with the licensed bands
(2.3, 2.5, and 2.6 GHz systems) it is allowed to transmit at higher levels of power, which required better air circulation. This resulted in the introduction of the Split Chassis. The recently introduced Tower Top Antenna (TTA) chassis, consists only of a digital shelf because the PAs are incorporated into the base of the RFS. Notice that the TTA digital shelf includes 8 new additional cards called RF Controllers or RFC. CAUTION! - Please contact Navini Technical support before attempting to exchange cards between chassis of different type and frequency to verify compatibility. Figure 23: BTS Chassis Split Chassis Split Chassis Combo Chassis Combo Chassis f f l l e e h h S S A A P P F F R R
f f l l e e h h S S
(Panel separates
(Panel separates RF and Digital RF and Digital Shelves) Shelves) TTA Chassis TTA Chassis
(PAs are in the RFS)
(PAs are in the RFS) l l a a t t i i i i g g D D 56 Part #40-00047-03 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 2b Connect Input Power Next, connect the power supply to the BTS card cage (Figure 24). The gauge of the wire is determined by the length of the run and by NEC/CEC standards (refer to Chapter 1, Page 8 Regulatory Information). Use a 60-amp circuit breaker when running the line. Terminate both of the input power wires and the ground wire with a - inch terminal lug. Assuming a +24 VDC power supply, connect the +24 VDC input power connections and the +24 VDC return wires to the BTS card cage. WARNING! Ensure that the power is off before connecting the input power wires to the BTS input terminals. If the input power is 120 VAC, plug the two power-supply input cables into 120 VAC outlets, and turn on the circuit breaker on the power supply. If the input power is 24 VDC, check for +24 VDC across the input terminals of the BTS card cage. If +24 VDC is not present across the input terminals, check all input power wiring for proper connections. Also, check the power supply for proper operation and the fuses for continuity. When finished, turn off the power supply. Figure 24: Split Chassis Power Connections BTS +24 VDC Input Terminals BTS +24 VDC Input Terminals Ground Lug Ground Lug Part #40-00047-03 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 57 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 2b Navini Networks, Inc. Power-interconnect wires between the power supply/rectifier and the digital chassis must have heat shrink tubing applied over the barrel of the terminal lugs after crimping the wire. Refer to Figure 25 below. Figure 25: Power-Interconnect Wires 1. Install UL-Listed Terminals 1. Install UL-Listed Terminals 2. Slide on heat-shrink tubing 2. Slide on heat-shrink tubing 3. Apply heat to shrink tubing 3. Apply heat to shrink tubing 4. Install power cables 4. Install power cables 58 Part #40-00047-03 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 2b Connect BTS to Ground Connections All connections need to be checked before power is applied to the system. At a minimum, perform the following:
Ensure continuity across all ground connections. Ensure an open connection from the power supply output (positive input to the BTS card cage) to frame ground. Check all regulatory standards (Chapter 1, Page 8 Regulatory Information) related to power and grounding. All power and ground conductors must be mechanically supported to avoid strain of the wires and connection points. Figure 26: Preparing Power and Grounding Connector Tips Connect Chassis Alarms The chassis contains two connectors that are used to send alarm indications to the BTS when the BTS is housed in an outdoor enclosure. One of the connectors, labeled CABINET ALARM, is used to trigger alarm conditions that occur within the external chassis. The second connector, labeled BBU, is used to process alarms from a battery backup unit. Refer to Appendix P for instructions on connecting the alarms. Part #40-00047-03 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 59 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 2b Navini Networks, Inc. Install GPS Antennas Check all regulatory standards (refer to Chapter 1, Page 8 Regulatory Information) prior to installation. As mentioned earlier, the model of GPS antenna used with the Ripwave Base Station is the VIC 100, as shown in Figure 27. Mount each GPS antenna module, run the cable through the pipe clamp mount. Connect the cable to the GPS antenna, then, weatherize the connection. Secure the antenna module to the pipe clamp mount using the captive mounting hardware. Install the GPS antenna module and the pipe clamp mount to the mounting pipe and tighten the two mounting screws. Figure 27: VIC 100 GPS Antenna Antenna Mounting Hardware Mounting Hardware Mounting Screws Mounting Screws The mounting location for the GPS antenna is determined during the site survey. When installing, ensure that the following requirements are met:
The GPS antenna is installed within 100 feet of the BTS. The GPS antenna is located to provide the widest view of the sky (objects such as buildings or trees can interfere with signals from the satellite).
60 Part #40-00047-03 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003
1 | Chapter 2c | Users Manual | 739.68 KiB | October 12 2003 |
Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 2c Install the RFS Check all regulatory standards (refer to Chapter 1, Page 8 Regulatory Information) prior to installation. Now that the BTS is in place, the RFS is readied for installation. Follow the Panel or Omni Antenna information and procedures below. Reference the specifications in Appendix H. Panel Antenna The RFS Panel antenna is installed on a structure, such as a tower or a pole, which is defined in the site survey and design. Following are the steps to complete the installation of the panel antenna. Verify RFS Operation Verify proper operation of the RFS before installation. Test the transmit and receive path of each antenna in the RFS per Appendix S, and using the RFS System Test Form in Appendix O. Set the Downtilt Check the engineering study for the required downtilt of the antenna. The panel antenna has 6o of fixed electrical downtilt but it can be mechanically adjusted for an uptilt of 0 to 10o. As a result, the main lobe of the beam can be pointed between 4 degrees above and 6 degrees below the horizon. Figure 28: Panel Antenna Elements Weatherized Weatherized connectors connectors Mounting Mounting Bracket Bracket
(downtilt
(downtilt adjustment) adjustment) Part #40-00047-04 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 61 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 2c Navini Networks, Inc. Omni Antenna An Omni antenna has 2 degrees of fixed electrical downtilt Figure 29: Omni Antenna Elements Weatherized Weatherized connectors connectors Mounting Mounting bracket bracket Ground Ground Cable Hoist Cable Hoist Set the Azimuth Position the RFS on the mounting pole or structure, ensuring that the antenna is pointing in the proper azimuth direction determined by the engineering study. For an omni, the first antenna element must face East (Figure 30). Figure 30: Bottom of an Omni Antenna Showing Correct Orientation Make sure that Make sure that this arrow this arrow points due East points due East 62 Part #40-00047-04 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 2c The azimuth direction is stated in degrees from true North. Use the diagram shown in Figure 31 to determine the declination angle for your location. Add or subtract the declination angle from magnetic North to obtain true North. Tighten the four nuts on each of the two antenna mounting brackets to secure the RFS to the mounting pole. Use a compass to check the direction from the center of the panel (this is magnetic North). Be sure that you are using a compass calibrated for the geographical region where you are. There are five such regions and a compass calibrated for one of them will not work properly in the others. Figure 31: Declination Angle in Degrees (Year 2000) Since this is not the year 2000 anymore, you will want to check this reference map to learn how your magnetic declination shifts from year to year. Notice that the map measures annual shifts in minutes. Since it takes 60 minutes to equal 1 degree, if you notice that your location has a declination shift of 5 minutes per year, this means it will be another 12 years before your declination adjustment changes by one whole degree. The following web site provides more details on how to use these charts: http://www.thecompassstore.com/decvar.html Figure 31a: Annual Change in Magnetic Declination Part #40-00047-04 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 63 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 2c Navini Networks, Inc. Verify the Downtilt Using an inclinometer (Figure 32), check the downtilt of the RFS antenna. If required, adjust the angle using the downtilt adjustment brackets. Be sure to include any electrical uptilt or downtilt built into the antenna in the setting. Tighten the mounting hardware to secure the RFS in the proper position. Recheck the downtilt angle again to verify proper position. Repeat the procedure for all other antennas that are installed in the system. Ensure that they are mounted in the proper direction and with the correct downtilt angle. Figure 32: Measuring Antenna Downtilt For accurate results, align the For accurate results, align the inclinometer against the metal frame inclinometer against the metal frame on the side of the panel antenna, which on the side of the panel antenna, which is guaranteed to be parallel to the is guaranteed to be parallel to the antenna elements antenna elements Install Surge Protectors If lightning protection is required, as determined by the customer, the power/data lightning arrestors must comply with UL497. Cables, such as the RF and power/data cables, in excess of 140 feet in length must have protective devices installed that are UL497A or UL497B listed. 64 Part #40-00047-04 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003
1 | Chapter 2d | Users Manual | 984.84 KiB | October 12 2003 |
Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 2d The RFS has ten cable connectors on the bottom of the unit. Eight are antenna connections, with the connectors alternately numbered from right to left as shown in Figure 33. The two connectors in the middle are for antenna calibration and data/DC power connections. Install surge protectors on nine (9) of the RFS connectors the eight antenna connectors and the calibration connector. The surge protectors must be installed directly to the RFS to provide protection for the antenna elements. Torque the surge protectors to 20-24 inch-pounds. Figure 33: PolyPhaser PSX-ME Surge Protectors at the Antenna (RF and Cal Cables) 8 8 4 4 7 7 3 3 6 6 2 2 5 5 1 1 Surge Surge Protectors Protectors Figure 34: Surge Protectors PSX-ME PSX-ME PSX-ME PSX PSXPSX DGXZ+06NFNF-A DGXZ+06NFNF-A 3406.17.0012 3406.17.0009 3406.17.0012 3406.17.0012 3406.17.0009 3406.17.0009 Part #40-00047-05 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 65 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 2d Navini Networks, Inc. Install Cables Between the RFS & BTS Connect all of the cables the eight antenna cables, the calibration cable and the data/power cable to the surge protectors on the RFS. For ease of installation, install the cables from the inside out. Ensure that the proper cable is connected to the proper antenna (Figure 35). Torque the RF cable connectors to 20-24 inch-pounds. Figure 35: Completed Cable Installation at the Antenna 8 8 4 4 7 7 3 3 6 6 2 2 5 5 1 1 RF Cables RF Cables Calibration Calibration Cable Cable Data/Power Data/Power Cable Cable Install Grounding Kit on Cables Install grounding kit wire connections on the eight (8) RFS cables and the one (1) CAL cable per the instruction sheet that comes with the grounding kit. Install the grounding wire in a position on the cable so that it can be attached to the ground buss bar that is mounted close to the RFS. More than one ground buss bar may be installed in the system, depending on the length of the cable run. Reference the Regulatory Information in Chapter 1, Page 8. 66 Part #40-00047-05 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 2d Connect Ground Wires to the Ground Buss Bar Connect the ground wires on the cables to the ground buss bar using the hardware supplied with the grounding kit. Connect the ground stud on the RFS to the ground buss bar. Use a -inch terminal lug to connect the ground wire to the ground stud on the RFS. Connect the ground buss bar to earth ground. An example is shown in Figure 36. Figure 36: RFS Grounding Ground Wires Ground Wires Earth Ground Earth Ground Ground Buss Bar Ground Buss Bar Test the RFS & Cables Test the RFS and the eight (8) cables using Appendix O, the RFS System Test Form. Record the results in the form. For this test, use the cable connectors that will be attached to the BTS. Include the jumpers and all surge protectors. Part #40-00047-05 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 67 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 2d Navini Networks, Inc. Weatherize the RFS Cable Connectors Weatherize all ground wire connections exposed to weather using electrical tape and butyl mastic tape. Follow the instructions supplied with the weatherproofing kit. Examples are shown in Figure 37 and 38. Figure 37: Weatherizing RFS Connectors Cables Figure 38: Weatherizing Ground Wires 68 Part #40-00047-05 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003
1 | Chapter 2e | Users Manual | 859.48 KiB | October 12 2003 |
Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 2e Connect RF Cables & Alarms to BTS Connect all of the cables to the BTS. The connection points are shown in Figures 39, 40, 41, and 42. Torque the cable connectors to 20-24 inch-pounds. If applicable, connect the cabinet alarm connector and Battery Backup connector (Cabinet Alarm and BBU) to the back of the chassis. More information on connecting alarms, rectifiers, and battery backup equipment are provided in Appendix P and Appendix J, respectively. Figure 39: Combo Chassis Rear View RF Cables RF Cables Cabinet Cabinet Alarms Alarms Data/Power Data/Power GPS 2 GPS 2 Battery Battery Backup Backup Unit Unit
(BBU)
(BBU) Alarms Alarms DC Power DC Power CAL GPS 1 CAL GPS 1 Figure 40: Split Chassis RF/PA Shelf Rear View Part #40-00047-06 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 69 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 2e Navini Networks, Inc. Connectors ON/OFF Connectors ON/OFF Power Power Data/Power Data/Power Figure 41: Split Chassis Digital Shelf Rear View Figure 42: TTA Chassis Digital Shelf Rear View Cable Connector Cable Connector Cal Cable Cal Cable Battery Backup Connector Battery Backup Connector Cabinet Alarms Connector Cabinet Alarms Connector GPS 1 GPS 1 GPS 2 GPS 2 e e e l l l b b b a a a C C C l l l a a a C C C 2 2 2
S S S P P P G G G 1 1 1
S S S P P P G G G NOTE: Do not ground the negative terminal of the rectifier for the TTA installation. 70 Part #40-00047-06 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 2e Omni Antenna The RFS Omni antenna is installed on a structure, such as a tower or a pole, which is defined in the site survey and design. Following are the steps to complete the installation of the panel antenna. Refer to the Regulatory Information in Chapter 1, Page 8 prior to installing. Assemble the Antenna Mount per the instructions that come with it (Figure 43). Use a compass to determine which direction is true East (incorporating declination angle - see Figure 31). Figure 43: Omni Antenna Mount Position the Antenna Mount in a direction to provide accessibility to the RFS after it is installed. Position and install the Antenna Mount on the mounting structure so that any one of the eight mounting hole pins is facing East. Tighten the Antenna Mount hardware to secure it to the structure (Figure 44). Figure 44: Secured Omni Antenna Mount Mounting Hole Pin Part #40-00047-06 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 71 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 2e Navini Networks, Inc. Sweep the RFS antenna inputs for dB loss. Record all results for later calculations. Position the RFS on the Antenna Mount, ensuring that the arrow on the bottom of the Antenna Mount faces true East. Secure the RFS antenna to the Antenna Mount (Figure 45). Install surge protectors on the 8 antenna and 1 cal connectors. Figure 45: Omni Ground Stud Ground Stub Ground Stub Connect the eight antenna cables, cal cable, and Data/Power cable to the RFS antenna. Attach the ground wire to the ground stud. Install grounding kits from RF cables to buss bars. Sweep the antenna and cables from the RF cable connectors that attach to the BTS. Record all measurements. Weatherize all connections (Figure 46). Figure 46: Weatherized Connectors 72 Part #40-00047-06 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 2e Verify Installed Circuit Cards WARNING! Ensure that power to the BTS chassis is off before installing the circuit cards or any of the RF Power Amplifiers in the chassis. FUSES ARE NOT FIELD-REPLACEABLE. In case of need to replace a fuse on a CHP (F1), CC (F33, F17-32), SYN (F3), MDM (F1) or PA (F1) contact Navini Networks Technical Support CAUTION! For continued protection against risk of fire, replace only with the same type and rating of fuse. ATTENTION! Pour ne pas compromettre la protection contre les risques dincendie, remplacer par un fusible du mme type et des mmes caractristiques nominales. CAUTION! - Please contact Navini Technical support before attempting to exchange cards between chassis of different type and frequency to verify compatibility. The circuit cards, including the RF/PA cards, normally come seated in the BTS chassis. If they are already installed, verify that the correct cards are placed and seated properly. The RF/PA modules may be installed in any position on the top (RF) shelf. For the Digital shelf, refer to Figure 47 for correct card placement. Table 4 describes the name of each type of card in the Digital shelf. Tighten the screws to secure the RF/PAs into the RF shelf. For the circuit cards, follow the markings on the backplane for the position of each card in the Digital shelf. Make sure the ejectors on all cards are engaged in the chassis. Figure 46 represents a fully populated Digital shelf. If the BTS is not fully populated, blank panels are installed to fill in the empty card space. They are also used to fill in the empty space between the circuit cards and the end of the cabinet. Table 4: Digital Card Names Abbreviation SYN IF CHP MDM CC Card Name Synthesizer Intermediate Frequency Channel Processor Modem Communications Controller Number of Cards 1 or 2 Always 2 Always 2 Always 2 1 or 2 Part #40-00047-06 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 73 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 2e Figure 47: Digital Shelf Combo/Split Chassis Combo/Split Chassis N N Y Y S S P P H H F C F C I I M M D D M M C C C C Navini Networks, Inc. TTA TTA C C F F R R N N Y Y S S P P H H F C F C I I M M D D M M C C C C Base Station Installation Certification When the installation of the equipment is complete, the Base Station Installation Certification form needs to be completed and signed off by both the installer and the customer. A copy of this form may be found in Appendix T. 74 Part #40-00047-06 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003
1 | Chapter 3 | Users Manual | 836.03 KiB | October 12 2003 |
Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 3 Chapter 3: Commissioning This chapter provides post-installation instructions on provisioning, configuring, calibrating, testing, and commissioning the Ripwave Base Station. Review Customer Network Plans As part of preparing to put the BTS into commission, it is important to review the actual installed site against the customer Network Architecture Plan - i.e., checking that all equipment and software are installed and available for use. Verify that all routers are installed and IP addresses are correct. Finally, make sure the installation is approved and signed off by all responsible parties. Install EMS Server The EMS is the management interface for all elements in the Ripwave system. The EMS Server has to be installed on a computer that is connected directly to the Base Station (called the Test EMS) or through the system backhaul (customer EMS). For testing purposes, the Test EMS Server is connected through an Ethernet hub or switch to the Ethernet port found on the front of the BTS (Figure 48). Note that the EMS Server does not support more than one Network Interface Card (NIC). The other port on the front of the CC card is a Serial (Universal Data) Port, also known as the Console Port. Using a laptop/portable computer connected through the data port, an on-site technician can communicate directly with the BTS using a terminal emulation software package. However, this is not recommended. It is always best to rely on the EMS interface for BTS information. When connecting the Ripwave equipment to the backhaul, refer to the Regulatory Information in Chapter 1, Page 8 specifically regarding cabling to Ethernet or T1 backhauls. Ethernet connections require a UL497B listed protection device to be installed between the BTS and the first network device. T1 connections must be routed from the BTS through a UL497 listed protection device at the demarcation point. The interconnect cables for T1 backhauls must be a minimum #26 AWG wire, in accordance with NEC/CEC standards. Part #40-00047-07 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 9, 2003 75 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 3 Navini Networks, Inc. Figure 48: Ports on CC and MDM Cards Combo/Split Chassis Combo/Split Chassis TTA TTA Serial Ports (factory use only) Serial Ports (factory use only) Serial Ports (factory use only) Ethernet Connectors Ethernet Connectors Ethernet Connectors T1 Connectors T1 Connectors Serial Port (a.k.a. Console Port) Serial Port (a.k.a. Console Port) If the customers EMS is installed and can be accessed through the backhaul, it can be connected via T1 or Ethernet to the BTS and used for testing purposes. The EMS software installation procedures can be found in the EMS Software Installation Guide, P/N 40-00017-00. After the EMS Server and Client applications are installed, the EMS database needs to be configured with the settings that are designated for the Base Station. The settings are found in the Network Architecture Plan provided by the customer. Verify Cable Connections Before proceeding, verify that all power is connected and present. Ensure that all T1 or Ethernet connections are installed correctly and are active. Verify that the BTS and the RFS are properly installed and that all cables are connected. 76 Part #40-00047-07 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 9, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 3 Configure & Power Up the BTS Overview During initial power up a minimal set of configuration parameters have to be input to the BTS through the serial port on the CC card. These early configuration parameters are referred to as the boot parameters. They are required to get the BTS to communicate with the EMS Server so that all the configuration data can be downloaded from EMS to the BTS. The PC used at this point is a Test EMS Server (i.e., laptop). If the customers actual EMS Server is available, a separate Test EMS (i.e., laptop) may not be necessary. For simplification, whether it is a Test EMS laptop or the customers EMS Server, we refer to the device at this stage as the Test EMS. Set Up the Test EMS Typically, in order to keep a constant link an Ethernet hub (10/100 Base-T) connects the Test EMS to the BTS via a male to female RS-232 cable connected to the CC serial port. A connection between the serial port on the CC and the serial port on the Test EMS is also used. Standard communication software, i.e., a standard terminal emulation program, such as Windows HyperTerm or TeraTerm, is used during these early configuration stages. Step 1. Verify all RF cables going to the BTS are securely connected to the proper connector. Step 2. Connect an Ethernet cable to the Ethernet connector located on the CC card and to an Ethernet hub. Connect another Ethernet cable from the Ethernet hub to the Ethernet connector on the PC containing the Test EMS Server and Client applications. Step 3. Connect an RS-232 cable (DB-9 male to female) to the serial port (UART) located on the CC card to the serial port connector on the Test EMS computer. Note: A VT 100 terminal or any standard Windows based ASCII terminal emulation program can be used for connecting to the serial port. The connection for HyperTerminal is explained here. The steps to get to the HyperTerminal program may be different due to variances in the Operating Systems and in the setup of the PC. Step 4. Power on the Test EMS Server. Step 5. On the desktop, go to Start > Programs > Accessories > HyperTerminal >
HyperTerminal (using whichever terminal emulation program you are running). In the COM1 Properties window (Figure 49), under the Port Settings tab, enter the following configuration options. Click OK. Step 6. Part #40-00047-07 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 9, 2003 77 Navini Networks, Inc. Bits per second:
Bits per second:
9600 9600 Data Bits:
Data Bits:
Parity:
Parity:
Stop Bits:
Stop Bits:
8 8 None None 1 1 Flow Control:
Flow Control:
None None Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 3 Figure 49: COM1 Properties Step 7. On the Test EMS Server, click on the Server icon to start the EMS Server. NOTE: This step assumes you have loaded and configured the EMS Server & Client applications. Step 8. Click on the EMS Configuration & Alarm Manager (CAM) icon to start the EMS Client GUI. Step 9. At the EMS Configuration & Alarm Manager login screen, enter the user name and password. The defaults are both emsAdmin. Add BTS in EMS Once you have the CAM application running on the Test EMS server, you will need to click on the BTS element tab to add the new BTS. Only the minimal configuration parameters have to be completed at this time - i.e., BTS name, ID, IP address, subnet mask, and gateway. Follow the Network Architecture Plan designed for this system. Also configure the GPS offset time. The default is 0 minutes, indicating the BTS would be located in the same time zone as Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). Change this value to whatever time is appropriate to the location of the BTS in relation to GMT time zone. For example, if the BTS is located in Dallas, Texas, which is 6 hours behind GMT time zone, you would enter 360. As you will see in the section that follows, you will also configure the RFS splitter loss at this time. For more details about configuring a BTS, refer to the Ripwave Configuration Guide. 78 Part #40-00047-07 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 9, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 3 Configure RFS (Splitter Loss Value) Each RFS shipped is pre-programmed for the customers specific operating environment. An RFS Configuration CD accompanies the RFS equipment when it is shipped. The CD includes an RFS script and a Quick Guide with procedures on selecting the appropriate splitter loss values to be entered into the EMS database for the given Base Station. Each Configuration disk is unique to the individual RFS that is shipped. You cannot use the same disk on other RFS equipment. RFS Configuration Procedure Step 1. Remove the RFS Configuration disk from the RFS packaging, and insert it in the floppy drive of the Test EMS. Step 2. Copy the folder named RFS that is on the disk to the Test EMS Server:
<ems install dir>/scripts. It will take approximately 20 seconds to complete. Step 3. Open the new folder on the EMS server. You will see a list of file names. The format of the file names is as follows:
RFS_serial number_frequency.cli Example: RFS_024300001_2402500.cli - This example of the configuration file is for an RFS with serial number 024300001 and a center frequency of 2.4025. Verify the correct serial number in the file name against the serial number of the RFS equipment. The equipment serial number may be found on the back of the RFS panel or on the side of the bottom cylinder of the omni antenna. Step 4. Determine which file you need to run, depending on the provisioned frequency of your BTS. NOTE: For 2.6 GHz systems, select the frequency that is closest to your provisioned center frequency. To find the provisioned center frequency for your BTS, open the EMS Configuration & Alarm Manager (CAM) application. Select the BTS tab and specific BTS, then Air Interface / Layer 2 / Carrier Data / Show Configuration. This will display the center frequency information. Step 5. Open the selected CLI file for editing using any text processing application program. Note the power splitter values listed there (i.e., write them down or print them out). Step 6. Modify the line that starts with bts by changing the BTS ID for your BTS. The default is BTS 1. For example, if the ID for your BTS is 252, change the 1 to 252. Part #40-00047-07 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 9, 2003 79 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 3 Navini Networks, Inc. Step 7. Save this file as text, and then close it. Step 8. Start the EMS Config CLI application to run script <CLI script>. Do this by entering the following:
>enable <user name> <password>
>configure
>script scripts/rfs/rfs_<serial number>_<7-digit frequency>.cli NOTE: For Unix operating systems, the CLI text is case sensitive and the slash marks should be backward slashes instead of forward slashes. Step 9. View the Power Splitter values in EMS to verify that the CLI script ran as expected. The Power Splitter values may be found under Layer 1 / Show Configuration >
Antenna Table. You will need to Refresh the active screen to view the updated information. Step 10. Type Exit twice to exit the Config CLI edit mode. Power Up BTS Now you are ready to power up the BTS. Step 1. Ensure that input power has been connected to the BTS. Step 2. Switch the Power to ON. If the BTS is a Combo Chassis, the switch is located on the top right front of the BTS. The green Power On light next to the switch will illuminate
(Figure 50). If the BTS is a Split Chassis, the Power ON switch is located on the back lower middle of the Digital shelf. The green LEDs on the RF/PA modules and the circuit cards in the BTS chassis should illuminate. The Power switch for the TTA is located on the lower middle back of the chassis. 80 Part #40-00047-07 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 9, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 3 Power Power ON/OFF ON/OFF Combo Chassis Combo Chassis Figure 50: BTS Power On Switches Step 3. Watch for the auto-boot countdown command. Type in config on the computer keyboard to interrupt the standard boot sequence. The window of time to type in config after auto-boot starts is 20 seconds. Off/On switch Off/On switch Split Chassis Split Chassis BTS Bootup The BTS is shipped with a default value of a 20-second countdown to interrupt the standard bootup sequence. You can escape the standard bootup when the display shows the following:
autoboot countdown : quick [quick|delayed]
To escape the initialization sequence, type in config before the 20-second counter reaches zero. Note: Under the next section, Boot Prompt, you will see how to disable the 20-second countdown in lieu of a shorter, 1-second countdown. This will minimize downtime during unattended restart conditions, for example, if there is a power outage and the BTS is recovering. Part #40-00047-07 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 9, 2003 81 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 3 Navini Networks, Inc. Boot Prompt After you have escaped from the automated boot sequence, the console will display a rudimentary Boot prompt:
[Navini Boot]:
This prompt offers the ability to perform a small set of operations. Enter ? or h followed by the Enter key to display a list of commands (Exhibit 1). To invoke any of the commands, simply enter the single letter command with optional parameters, followed by the Enter key. Exhibit 1: Boot Commands
[Navini Boot]: ?
? - print this list
@ - resume boot sequence p - print boot params c - change boot params d adrs[,n] - display memory m adrs - modify memory f adrs, nbytes, value - fill memory t adrs, adrs, nbytes - copy memory
@ Use this command once all parameters have been set as desired. This will resume the boot initialization sequence that you escaped from previously. p This command displays a concise representation of the current parameters used for boot configuration. c Use this command to alter the current boot parameters. Once selected, a detailed sequence of options is prompted, and is covered in detail later. After all of the items in this list are completed, you return to the [Navini Boot]: prompt. This option sequence allows you either to accept the current value by pressing the Enter key or to enter a new value from the range or values listed, followed by the Enter key. Additionally, you can enter . followed by the Enter key to erase the current value of an item and return it to a default state. If you make an error, you can choose -
(hyphen) followed by the Enter key to return to the previous item in the list. Alternatively, you can fix an error by proceeding with the selections and select change' when you return to the
[Navini Boot]: prompt. d Display memory allows you to display portions of the BTSs memory with user-defined values. It should only be performed with the assistance of a certified Navini service technician. m Modify memory allows you to alter portions of the BTSs memory with user defined values. It should only be performed with the assistance of a certified Navini service technician. 82 Part #40-00047-07 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 9, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 3 f Fill memory allows you to alter portions of the BTSs memory with a fixed pattern. It should only be performed with the assistance of a certified Navini service technician. t Fill memory allows you to alter portions of the BTSs memory with a pattern from another area of memory. It should only be performed with the assistance of a certified Navini service technician. Ethernet Configuration The Ethernet configuration is grouped into three sections: general, EMS, and traffic path. An example of the Ethernet configuration parameters is shown in Exhibit 2. Exhibit 2: Ethernet Configuration
[Navini Boot]: p date and time : 01/09/2003[10:19] MM/dd/yyyy[hh:mm]
autoboot countdown : delayed [quick|delayed]
ems inet : 172.16.0.10 snmp community : public traffic path : enet [enet|atm]
mac address : 00:04:6a:00:01:20 ip on enet (active) : 172.16.23.181 ip on enet (standby) : 172.16.23.182 netmask on enet : 255.255.0.0 ip on backplane : 10.0.0.1 gateway on enet : 172.16.0.100 General The general section offers you the ability to change the date and time manually. If a GPS has been installed, the BTS will automatically set the date and time:
date and time : 08/21/2002[13:21] MM/dd/yyyy[hh:mm]
When this line is displayed, the current date (08/21/2002) and time [13:21] are displayed. Accept the defaults by pressing the Enter key, or enter date at the console and a new value using the format indicated in military time (Hours 1-24). All 5 fields must be entered as specified. Leading zeroes can be omitted. Previously, it was mentioned that the 20-second auto-boot countdown timer can be disabled and a 1 second countdown can be used instead. To enable this feature, change the autoboot countdown item from delayed (which is 20 seconds) to quick, which is 1 second:
autoboot countdown : delayed [quick|delayed]
Part #40-00047-07 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 9, 2003 83 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 3 Navini Networks, Inc. EMS This section concerns the configuration of the EMS Server itself. First, the Internet (inet) IP address of the Server is specified. Make sure to fill this field with the address of the Server used to configure this BTS. Your BTS is shipped with this field un-initialized. You must provide a valid 4-digit IP address before you can proceed. For example:
ems inet : 172.16.0.10 The second parameter that you must specify to allow the EMS Server to recognize this BTS is a community string for the EMSs Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) interface. The default community string shipped with the BTS is public. Press the Enter key to accept this default, or type in a new value and press the Enter key to alter it:
snmp community : public Traffic Path The last major block of configurations required for an Ethernet backhaul to the BTS is the traffic path parameters. The first prompt instructs the BTS to use the Ethernet as the WAN (backhaul) configuration. It must be set to enet for an Ethernet backhaul. If atm is selected, proceed with the description in the ATM or IMA sections. The BTS is pre-
configured to use Ethernet for the WAN connection. Press the Enter key to accept this default:
traffic path : enet [enet|atm]
The BTS address is specified next. Every BTS must be uniquely addressed and have values that equate in the EMS configurations. This address information defines the Layer 2 parameters first, and then it defines the Layer 3 parameters. For Layer 2, you are only given an opportunity to see the Ethernet Media Access Control (MAC) address used by this BTS. This is a unique number programmed in the BTS. You cannot alter it. However, situations may develop in which you need to know the MAC address and, therefore, need to display the information. For example:
mac address : 00:04:6a:00:01:20 Next are the IP addresses that represent this BTS: one for the active CC card and one for the standby CC card. Enter the IP for the active controller card, for 172.16.23.181, and the next IP
(172.16.23.182) is automatically assigned to the Standby card. ip on enet (active) : 172.16.23.181 ip on enet (standby) : 172.16.23.182 84 Part #40-00047-07 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 9, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 3 The standby field is only displayed for your convenience and cannot be altered. Note that the BTS automatically handles switching the address when a failure occurs on an active Controller card, requiring the standby Controller to go into service. However, the MAC addresses remain fixed. Coupled with any IP configuration is a need to specify the corresponding subnet mask. Refer to common network administration literature for guides on addresses, networks, masks, and gateways. In short, the subnet mask identifies the portion of the IP address that is common to those devices connected to the same Ethernet. The most important other device is the BTSs default gateway (specified later). The portion is identified using a logical and of the mask with the address. For example, a subnet mask of 255.255.0.0 and with an IP address of 172.16.23.182 yields a network of 172.16.x.x. In this case, the default gateway must also be on the 172.16.x.x network. The BTS requires that this association be met. If not, you will be asked to try again. netmask on enet : 255.255.0.0 The BTS uses a high-speed Serial Line Internet Protocol (SLIP) connection to communicate with the redundant T1/Controller Card. This interface is only used internally and has a fixed subnet mask of 255.255.255.252. The host portion of the address that is, the least significant 2 bits is automatically provided by the software based upon slot ID. However, you may want to alter the default network address to avoid conflict with your network. The BTS is shipped with the 10.0.0.0 network as the internal network. This is a reserved network not used on the Internet. However, if your private network utilizes this private address space, you may need to change it to avoid the conflict. ip on backplane : 10.0.0.1 As for the default gateway for the BTS, all traffic routed outside the directly connected Ethernet port goes through the gateway. Furthermore, the gateway must be reachable on the directly connected Ethernet port. Therefore, the BTS will prevent you from entering a default gateway address that fails the logical and test discussed previously. This address is specified on the line item shown below:
gateway on enet : 172.16.0.100 Part #40-00047-07 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 9, 2003 85 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 3 Navini Networks, Inc. ATM/T1 Configuration For an ATM/T1 configuration, the items shown in Exhibit 3 are identical to Ethernet with the exception of the traffic path, which must show atm for this type of configuration. Exhibit 3: ATM/T1 Configuration date and time : 01/09/2003[10:22]
autoboot countdown : delayed ems inet : 172.16.0.10 snmp community : public traffic path : atm mac address : 00:04:6a:00:01:20 ip on atm (active) : 172.16.23.181 ip on atm (standby) : 172.16.23.182 netmask on atm : 255.255.0.0 When ATM is selected for the WAN interface using the traffic mode parameter, an additional set of parameters is required (Exhibit 6). First of all, another IP address must be identified for the ATM interface. The ATM IP address cannot be the same as the Ethernet IP address. In this case, the Ethernet IP address is only used for debug purposes and is a non-routed interface. This means that the BTS can only reach other computers directly connected to the Ethernet port of the BTS. The only routed interface available is through the ATM port. This routed interface address is specified with the ip on atm line item and the corresponding netmask parameter (Exhibit 4). The information on network address specifications from the Ethernet Configuration section of this chapter applies to ATM as well. For ATM, the only gateway allowed for the BTS is on the ATM interface, as specified here. Exhibit 4: Additional ATM Parameters ip on atm (active) : 172.17.0.101 ip on atm (standby) : 172.17.0.102 netmask on atm : 255.255.0.0 ip on backplane : 10.0.0.1 gateway on atm : 172.17.0.100 For an ATM system, the BTS must have some additional configuration for the Management Private Virtual Channel (Management PVC). Recall the boot parameter philosophy discussed before. The boot parameters only identify those settings required to allow the BTS to reach the EMS. Note that the boot parameters only allow specification for one PVC (the Management PVC), which is used to reach the EMS. All user traffic PVC parameters are specified in the EMS configuration. Ensure that the EMS parameters for the Management PVC match those being set here through the boot prompt. If not, as soon as connection is made with the EMS, the Management PVC will be reconfigured and can potentially disconnect the BTS from the network. 86 Part #40-00047-07 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 9, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 3 The PVC configuration is broken into 3 sections: ATM layer parameters; optional Inverse Multiplexing over ATM (IMA) parameters, and T1 physical layer parameters. The first item selects which ATM interface will be used for the Management PVC. If IMA is not selected, you may select from one of the 8 T1 ports numbered 1-8 using the option t1-N, where N is the port number. This is the same interface port number specified in the EMS. If IMA is desired, reference the following section:
pvc type-atm i/f : t1-0 [t1-(1-8)|ima-(1-2)]
The circuit identifier for this segment of the Management PVC is the next item specified. The first parameter identifies the maximum number of bits for any PVCs identifier Virtual Path Identifier/ Virtual Channel Identifier (VPI/VCI) pair. The BTS restricts the available set to 13 total bits. However, you are free to divide those 13 bits between the VPI and VCI as needed, with the VPI having a maximum allocation of 8 bits. You can choose the number of bits for each by selecting two values separated by a :. Or you may select the BTS default of 3 VPI bits and 10 VCI bits by pressing the Enter key:
pvc id size vpi:vci : 3:10 [1-8:1-13]
Having specified the number of significant VPI and VCI bits, now select the actual identifier. The BTS will restrict the values entered for the VPI and VCI to the ranges you selected in the previous size specification. For instance, if 3:10 is selected as a size allocation, the VPI must be between 0 and 7. Again, you can select the values for the VPI and VCI separated by a : or accept the default value of VPI = 1 and VCI = 100 by pressing the Enter key. Be careful not to use the reserved VCI values from 0-15 that are often used in ATM networks for Operation, Administration, and Maintenance (OAM) purposes. pvc vpi:vci : 1:100 [0-255:16-8192]
The service category for the Management PVC is specified next. The choices are Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) or Constant Bit Rate (CBR). Other ATM service categories are available for traffic PVCs, but those are specified in the EMS configuration. UBR and CBR both require a set data rate and delay variation parameter. The data rate is specified in cells per second in the ATM Traffic Contracts Peak Cell Rate (PCR) field. The delay variation is in the ATM Cell Delay Variation Tolerance (CDVT) in the ATCs CDVT field. Specify the PCR and the CDVT values separated by a : or chose the default by pressing the Enter key. pvc service category : ubr [cbr|ubr]
pvc atc pcr:cdvt : 3641:100 [1-3641:0-100]
Part #40-00047-07 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 9, 2003 87 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 3 Navini Networks, Inc. The final set of values is used to configure the T1 parameters. The line type allows you to select Extended Super-Frame (ESF) or D4. ESF format is the standard format for ATM/T1 applications. D4 format is supported as an alternate; however, T1 signaling capabilities may be limited. Check your network plans for a definition for your specific application. line type : esf [esf|d4]
Additionally, you must choose a line coding type:
line coding : b8zs [b8zs|ami]
The approximate length of the T1 line is specified next. It is used to control the signal conditioning used on the T1:
line length (ft) : 500 Finally, the T1s timing source must be specified. A T1 uses only one timing source either at the near-end or far-end of the line. You may select the BTS as the originator of the timing source by selecting local, or you may select the far-end as the timing reference by selecting loop. line clock source : loop [loop|local]
IMA Configuration If you decide to utilize IMA groups to pool the T1 resources, then the same parameters described for the ATM/T1 Configuration above also apply to configuring IMAs. Refer to Exhibit 5. Exhibit 5: IMA Configuration date and time : 08/21/2001[10:22]
ems inet : 172.16.0.10 snmp community : public traffic path : atm mac address : 00:04:6a:00:01:20 ip on enet (active) : 172.16.23.181 ip on enet (standby) : 172.16.23.182 netmask on enet : 255.255.0.0 ip on atm (active) : 172.17.0.101 ip on atm (standby) : 172.17.0.102 netmask on atm : 255.255.0.0 ip on backplane : 10.0.0.1 gateway on atm : 172.17.0.100 In addition, the ATM interface must be specified as IMA and reference one of two IMA groups used for the Management PVC. This IMA group must match what is identified in the EMS. Use 0 for the first group and 1 for the second group. 88 Part #40-00047-07 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 9, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 3 Each group identifies a set of T1 ports that are being combined to form one larger virtual port. For the sake of boot parameter specification, ALL T1 interfaces for the Management PVCs IMA group are assumed to be identical. So the parameters for T1 specifications apply to all T1s of the IMA group:
pvc type-atm i/f : ima-0 Once the IMA interface is selected, a set of IMA parameters must be specified for the IMA group used by the Management PVC. An IMA group inherently supports dynamic addition and drops of individual T1 facilities from the group to facilitate fault tolerance to failed T1 facilities. The minimum number of T1 ports, or links, that must exist for the IMA group to function is specified here. A value from 1-7 is required for each one of the receive and transmit directions. Separate the values with :. You can increase the values from the default of 1 link in each direction or accept the default by pressing the Enter key. ima min rx:tx links : 1:1 [1-7:1-7]
Next, specify which T1 ports are used to form the IMA group. This is a list of T1 port identifiers
(1-8), each separated by commas. The BTS makes sure you enter at least as many links as you specified for the minimum requirements above:
selected ima links : 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 The near- and far-end IMA protocols use an ID number to identify each other. This value must agree with that provisioned at the far-end of the IMA link. The BTS defaults to a value of 0, but you can specify any value from 0 to 255:
ima group id : 0 [0-255]
Group symmetry modes allow symmetric or asymmetric operation of IMA links:
ima symmetry : sym [sym|asym|asym-cfg]
IMA frame length specifies the size of the IMA frames that are being transmitted:
ima frame length : 128 [32|64|128]
The IMA alpha/beta/gamma parameters are used by the IMA frame synchronization mechanism.:
ima alpha:beta:gamma : 2:2:1 [1-2:1-5:1-5]
The IMA clock mode selects either a common or independent IMA clock mode (Exhibit 6). It is the same as for ATM/T1. Part #40-00047-07 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 9, 2003 89 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 3 Navini Networks, Inc. Exhibit 6: IMA Clock Mode ima clock mode : ctc [ctc|itc]
pvc id size vpi:vci : 3:10 pvc vpi:vci : 1:100 pvc service category : ubr pvc atc pcr:cdvt : 3641:100 line type : esf line coding : b8zs line length (ft) : 500 line clock source : loop Standard Boot Sequence The first items in Exhibit 7 (Ethernet) and Exhibit 8 (ATM) illustrate the BOOTROM loading and launching of the core application. This is a fixed process that cannot be altered in the field. Auto-booting is the process that can be escaped by user intervention, (i.e., enter config), in order to enter the boot prompt. Without user intervention, the remaining sequence occurs automatically; hence, auto-boot. Exhibit 7: Standard Ethernet Boot Sequence - Example System Boot Copyright 2000-2001 Navini Networks, Inc. Copyright 1984-1998 Wind River Systems, Inc. CPU: CC (PPC860P) Kernel Version: 5.4 BSP version: 1.0/110501 Creation date: Nov 5 2001, 13:09:12 Attaching to TFFS... done. Loading /tffs0/LOADS/BTSA/core...5249740 Starting at 0x10000... Auto-booting..............................Done Starting File System......................Done Mounting Drive /tffs0.....................Done Mounting Drive /dev0......................Done Mounting Drive /dev1......................Done Starting TCP/IP Stack.....................Done Starting ARP..............................Done Starting motfec I/f.......................Done Attaching sl(0) I/f.......................Done Attaching motfec(0) I/f...................Done Attaching lo(0) I/f.......................Done Mounting Remote Filesystem................Done Starting Telnet Daemon....................Done Starting Load Monitoring Tools............Done Loading Target Shell Symbols..............Done Starting WDB Tools........................Done Starting Target Shell.....................Done Initializing System Logger................Done Starting Application......................Done Starting LLC I/f..........................Done Starting LLC Proxy........................Done Starting Lpbk Proxy.......................Done 90 Part #40-00047-07 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 9, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 3 Starting CDI..............................Done Starting CAM I/f..........................Done Starting MME..............................Done Starting EtherBridge......................Done Starting DHCP Relay Agent.................Done Starting Peer ARP Proxy Agent.............Done Starting Host ARP Proxy Agent.............Done Starting Mobile IP Proxy Agent............Done Starting LLC Proxy........................Done Selecting Config Data Source as EMS ......Done Loading LLC...............................Done Initializing NvRam Mib ...................Done Initializing SNMP Agent ..................Done Pinging EMS (172.28.79.30)................Done Loading MTMG..............................Done Loading MDSW..............................Done Loading MBSW..............................Done Loading CAP...............................Done Loading AUX_..............................Done Loading LLC...............................Done Loading MTMG..............................Done Loading MDSW..............................Done Loading MBSW..............................Done Loading CAP...............................Done Loading BAUX..............................Done Loading BMCB..............................Done Loading MACA..............................Done Loading MACB..............................Done Loading CHAD..............................Done Loading CHTT..............................Done Loading CDSW..............................Done Loading BDSC..............................Done Loading CHSL..............................Done Loading CHMA..............................Done Loading AUX_..............................Done Loading LLC...............................Done Stopping LLC Proxy........................Done Evaluating bootload status................Done Initializing DSP(s).......................Done Starting LLC Proxy........................Done Starting LLC Proxy........................Done Updating Slot Table.......................Done Requesting EMS for Configuration Data ....Done Configuring BTS from EMS .................Done Starting LLC Proxy........................Done Configuring Diag Feature(s)...............Done
!!!!!!!! BTS Initialization Complete !!!!!!!!!
Z (TM) NNNN ZZZ NNNNNN ZZZZZ N N i i NNNNNNNN ZZZZZZ NN N NNNNNNNNNN ZZZZZZ N N N aaa v v i n nn i NNNNNNNNNNNN ZZZZZZ N N N a v v i nn n i NNNNNN NNNNNN ZZZZZZ N N N aaaa v v i n n i NNNNNN NNNNNN ZZZZZZ ZZ N NN a a v v i n n i NNNNNN Z NNNNNN ZZZZZZZZZZ N N aaaa v i n n i NNNNNN ZZZ NNNNNN ZZZZZZZZZ NNNNNN ZZZZZ NNNNNN ZZZZZZZ N E T W O R K S (TM) NNNNNNN ZZZZZZ NNNNN ZZZZZZ NNNNNNNNN ZZZZZZ NNN ZZZZZZ NNNNNNNNNN ZZZZZZ N ZZZZZZ Internet at the Speed of Thought (TM) NN NNNNNN ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZ NNNNNN ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZ Copyright (c) Navini Networks, Inc. 2000-2002 NNNNNN ZZZZZZZZZZZZ Copyright (c) Conexant, Inc. 2000-2001 NNNNNN ZZZZZZZZZZ Copyright (c) NComm, Inc. 1997-2001 NNNNNN ZZZZZZZZ Copyright (c) RSA Data Security, Inc. 1991-1992 NNNNN ZZZZZZ Copyright (c) SNMP Research, Inc. 1989-1999 NNN ZZZZ Copyright (c) Texas Instruments, Inc. 2000-2001 N Copyright (c) Wind River Systems, Inc. 1984-2000 Part #40-00047-07 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 9, 2003 91 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 3 Navini Networks, Inc. KERNEL : 5.4(WIND version 2.5) BSP : 1.0/01.19.00.00 CPU: CC (PPC860P). Processor #0. Memory Size: 0x3f80000. WDB: Ready. Last reset caused by a power on condition. Current time is FRI JUL 12 14:48:29 2002 bts-4 [Active]%
Exhibit 8: Standard ATM Boot Sequence - Example System Boot Copyright 2000-2001 Navini Networks, Inc. Copyright 1984-1998 Wind River Systems, Inc. CPU: CC (PPC860P) Kernel Version: 5.4 BSP version: 1.0/110501 Creation date: Nov 5 2001, 13:09:12 Attaching to TFFS... done. Loading /tffs0/LOADS/BTSB/core...5249740 Starting at 0x10000... Auto-booting..............................Done Starting File System......................Done Mounting Drive /tffs0.....................Done Mounting Drive /dev0......................Done Mounting Drive /dev1......................Done Starting TCP/IP Stack.....................Done Starting ARP..............................Done Starting motfec I/f.......................Done Starting wec I/f..........................Done Attaching wec(0) I/f......................Done Attaching sl(0) I/f.......................Done Attaching motfec(0) I/f...................Done Attaching lo(0) I/f.......................Done Mounting Remote Filesystem................Done Starting Telnet Daemon....................Done Starting Load Monitoring Tools............Done Loading Target Shell Symbols..............Done Starting WDB Tools........................Done Starting Target Shell.....................Done Initializing System Logger................Done Starting Application......................Done Starting LLC I/f..........................Done Starting LLC Proxy........................Done Starting Lpbk Proxy.......................Done Starting CDI..............................Done Include CME Starting T1 I/f...............Done Starting CAM I/f..........................Done Starting MME..............................Done Starting EtherBridge......................Done Starting DHCP Relay Agent.................Done Starting Peer ARP Proxy Agent.............Done Starting Host ARP Proxy Agent.............Done Starting Mobile IP Proxy Agent............Done Starting PCI Bridge.......................Done Starting Network Processor................Done Starting LLC Proxy........................Done Loading LLC...............................Done Selecting Config Data Source as EMS ......Done Initializing NvRam Mib ...................Done Booting Network Processor ................Done Configuring T1(s).........................Done Configuring ATM Interface.................Done 92 Part #40-00047-07 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 9, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 3 Configuring IMA Group.....................Done Configuring IMA Link......................Done Configuring PVC(s)........................Done Configuring Management PVC................Done Initializing SNMP Agent ..................Done Pinging EMS (172.28.79.30)................Done Loading MTMG..............................Done Loading MDSW..............................Done Loading MBSW..............................Done Loading CAP...............................Done Loading AUX_..............................Done Loading LLC...............................Done Loading MTMG..............................Done Loading MDSW..............................Done Loading MBSW..............................Done Loading CAP...............................Done Loading BAUX..............................Done Loading BMCB..............................Done Loading MACA..............................Done Loading MACB..............................Done Loading CHAD..............................Done Loading CHTT..............................Done Loading CDSW..............................Done Loading BDSC..............................Done Loading CHSL..............................Done Loading CHMA..............................Done Loading AUX_..............................Done Loading LLC...............................Done Stopping LLC Proxy........................Done Evaluating bootload status................Done Initializing DSP(s).......................Done Starting LLC Proxy........................Done Starting LLC Proxy........................Done Updating Slot Table.......................Done Requesting EMS for Configuration Data ....Done Configuring BTS from EMS .................Done Starting LLC Proxy........................Done Starting AtmMgmt..........................Done Configuring Diag Feature(s)...............Done
!!!!!!!! BTS Initialization Complete !!!!!!!!!
Z (TM) NNNN ZZZ NNNNNN ZZZZZ N N i i NNNNNNNN ZZZZZZ NN N NNNNNNNNNN ZZZZZZ N N N aaa v v i n nn i NNNNNNNNNNNN ZZZZZZ N N N a v v i nn n i NNNNNN NNNNNN ZZZZZZ N N N aaaa v v i n n i NNNNNN NNNNNN ZZZZZZ ZZ N NN a a v v i n n i NNNNNN Z NNNNNN ZZZZZZZZZZ N N aaaa v i n n i NNNNNN ZZZ NNNNNN ZZZZZZZZZ NNNNNN ZZZZZ NNNNNN ZZZZZZZ N E T W O R K S (TM) NNNNNNN ZZZZZZ NNNNN ZZZZZZ NNNNNNNNN ZZZZZZ NNN ZZZZZZ NNNNNNNNNN ZZZZZZ N ZZZZZZ Internet at the Speed of Thought (TM) NN NNNNNN ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZ NNNNNN ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZ Copyright (c) Navini Networks, Inc. 2000-2002 NNNNNN ZZZZZZZZZZZZ Copyright (c) Conexant, Inc. 2000-2001 NNNNNN ZZZZZZZZZZ Copyright (c) NComm, Inc. 1997-2001 NNNNNN ZZZZZZZZ Copyright (c) RSA Data Security, Inc. 1991-1992 NNNNN ZZZZZZ Copyright (c) SNMP Research, Inc. 1989-1999 NNN ZZZZ Copyright (c) Texas Instruments, Inc. 2000-2001 N Copyright (c) Wind River Systems, Inc. 1984-2000 KERNEL : 5.4(WIND version 2.5) BSP : 1.0/01.19.00.00 CPU: CC (PPC860P). Processor #0. Memory Size: 0x3f80000. WDB: Ready. Part #40-00047-07 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 9, 2003 93 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 3 Navini Networks, Inc. Last reset caused by a power on condition. Current time is FRI JUL 12 14:26:59 2002 bts-4 [Active]%
Attaching to TFFS... done. Loading /tffs0/LOADS/BTSB/core... 4337576 Starting at 0x10000... Auto-booting..............................Done The line items in Exhibit 9 are the ones that create and initialize the core components to the BTSs on-board file system. This file system is used to store operating code images, configuration data, and log files. The BTS Operating System software handles the images, data, and files and does not require operator assistance. There are three on-board file systems FLASH and RAM drives. The FLASH drive is at /tffs0 and the two RAM drives use /dev0 and /dev1. All on-board file system drives have dedicated functions and should not be altered or used through manual operations. Exhibit 9: On-board File Systems Starting File System......................Done Mounting Drive /tffs0.....................Done Mounting Drive /dev0......................Done Mounting Drive /dev1......................Done The sequence shown in Exhibit 10 initializes the TCP/IP stack on the BTS. The TCP, UDP, IP, and ARP protocol stacks are created. Interfaces for the stack are then created and attached to the stack. Three or four interfaces are created depending on the selection for traffic path in the boot parameters. The Fast Ethernet Controller, fec (0), is created and attached for the 10/100 Ethernet ports on the BTS. If atm is selected, then a WAN Ethernet Controller, WEC (0), is also created and attached to the stack to perform RFC1483 Ethernet bridging onto the ATM interface. Internally, the BTS utilizes a high-speed SLIP interface, sl (0), to provide communication between redundant devices. Finally, a debug local loopback interface, lo (0), is created and attached. Exhibit 10: TCP/IP Stack Starting TCP/IP Stack.....................Done Starting ARP..............................Done Starting fec I/f..........................Done Starting wec I/f..........................Done Attaching wec(0) I/f......................Done Attaching sl(0) I/f.......................Done Attaching fec(0) I/f......................Done Attaching lo(0) I/f.......................Done 94 Part #40-00047-07 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 9, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 3 Next, the user interface through the console port on the BTS is activated. It should be noted however, that once the Telnet Daemon has been started, this same interface is available remotely through a password protected telnet session. You can access the remote shell service by telnetting directly to the well-known Telnet port (23) of the BTS:
Starting Telnet Daemon....................Done This invokes a suite of tools accessible by the Navini developers to assess runtime loads of various components in the system:
Starting Load Monitoring Tools............Done This creates a database of commands that can be issued from the shell:
Loading Target Shell Symbols..............Done This in turn invokes a suite of tools accessible by the Navini software developers to access runtime debugging of the system:
Starting WDB Tools........................Done This starts the actual interface for the console command interface:
Starting Target Shell.....................Done The BTS is equipped with a rich suite of logs that are automatically collected for analysis by Navini developers in the unlikely event a crash occurs. This line item invokes the automatic log collection:
Initializing System Logger................Done The core software is separated into operating system initialization and Ripwave application software that provides OAM and bridging functionality. This line item identifies the transition point from OS initialization to the point where the OS begins spawning application level tasks:
Starting Application......................Done The next task provides an interface to the Logical Link Control (LLC) on the MDM card and forms a conduit for all message and user traffic from the CC to MDM card. Starting LLC I/f..........................Done Part #40-00047-07 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 9, 2003 95 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 3 Navini Networks, Inc. A Command and Debug Interface is initialized to extend rudimentary target shell capabilities for Navini developers to diagnose problems with the Digital Signal Processors on the MDM and CHP cards:
Starting CDI..............................Done The Content Addressable Memory (CAM) is used to provide mappings of users to channels. This mapping interface is started at this point:
Starting CAM I/f..........................Done The management entity for CPE mobility, nomadicity, and access control security is handled by the MME application that is started at this point:
Starting MME..............................Done The protocol bridging performed by the BTS for user traffic is handled by the EtherBridge component. Depending on the traffic mode selected, the EtherBridge will perform varying protocol encapsulation methods, such as RFC1483 bridging over ATM. The bridge is started at this point:
Starting EtherBridge......................Done Network layer protocol security and mobility applications are handled by specialized protocol handler components. Various modes of operation are configurable through the EMS and provide such services as DHCP address learning and authentication assistance via the DHCP Relay Agent, Proxy ARP broadcast security, and network layer mobility support. These components are started at this point:
Starting DHCP Relay Agent.................Done Starting Peer ARP Proxy Agent.............Done Starting Host ARP Proxy Agent.............Done Starting Mobile IP Proxy Agent............Done An LLC Proxy is an object that provides relay service via the LLC IF conduit to the MDM card. Objects on the CC card can communicate with an object on the MDM card directly using such a proxy. Several such proxied objects exist and are created with this message:
Starting LLC Proxy........................Done As the CC card downloads and initializes the DSPs on the MDM and CHP cards, each component is identified with a Loading message:
Loading LLC...............................Done 96 Part #40-00047-07 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 9, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 3 The next item that appears notifies the user of the location where the BTS is retrieving its Management Information Base (MIB). After initial installation and provisioning through the boot line, EMS is selected as the Config Data Source. In this case, all remaining parameters are downloaded from the EMS. Once the BTS and EMS have synchronized and ownership of individual elements in the MIB negotiated, subsequent reboots of the BTS will indicate the local BTS copy of the MIB is being used. This reduces the burden and start-up time of a system-wide restart:
Selecting Config Data Source as BTS ......Done Once the MIB information is identified, the SNMP agent is initialized. At this point, the EMS can begin communicating with the BTS via this agent:
Initializing SNMP Agent ..................Done The BTS tests that a path through the WAN exists to its EMS Server. That test is identified next in the sequence. If the EMS is selected as the Config Data Source, the initialization cannot continue. If the BTS is selected as the data source, the BTS can continue to initialize. However, it will be unmanaged, as the EMS cannot communicate with the BTS. Pinging EMS (172.16.0.10).................Done A status message appears indicating that all DSPs have been downloaded and are now beginning the initialization process:
Bootload is a success.....................Done Initialization can take a significant period of time, with progress through the DSP initialization shown by a growing string of . on this line. Initialization is complete with Done on this line, and the configuration data is passed to the application entities on each device:
Initializing DSP(s).......................Done Configuring LLC Bandwidth Management......Done Configuring MAC Carrier Data..............Done Configuring MAC Bandwidth Management......Done Configuring Layer 1.......................Done Configuring CPE Descriptor Table .........Done The final step in the BTS initialization is to start up the GPS subsystem. With the GPS, the BTS will remain time synchronized with the other BTSs in the network:
Configuring GPS...........................Done Part #40-00047-07 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 9, 2003 97 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 3 Navini Networks, Inc. The BTS is now provisioned with minimal data. This is enough data to be able to calibrate and test the BTS. Power cycle the BTS for the changes to take place. An example of a reboot is shown in Exhibit 11. Exhibit 11: BTS Reboot - Example
!!!!! Shutdown Started. Terminating all interfaces!!!!!!
Stopping Ime..............................Done Stopping Cme..............................Done Stopping EtherBridge......................Done Stopping CAM I/f..........................Done Stopping Lpbk Proxy.......................Done Stopping LLC Proxy........................Done Stopping LLC I/f...........................Done
!!!!!!!!!!!! Shutdown Completed. Rebooting !!!!!!!!!!!!!
. Attaching to TFFS... done. Loading /tffs0/LOADS/btsb/core...5569208 Starting at 0x10000... Auto-booting..............................Done Starting File System......................Done Mounting Drive /tffs0.....................Done Mounting Drive /dev0......................Done Mounting Drive /dev1......................Done Starting TCP/IP Stack.....................Done Starting ARP..............................Done Starting motfec I/f.......................Done Attaching sl(0) I/f.......................Done Attaching motfec(0) I/f...................Done Attaching lo(0) I/f.......................Done Mounting Remote Filesystem................Done Starting Telnet Daemon....................Done Starting Load Monitoring Tools............Done Loading Target Shell Symbols..............Done Starting WDB Tools........................Done Starting Target Shell.....................Done Initializing System Logger................Done Starting Application......................Done Starting LLC I/f..........................Done Starting LLC Proxy........................Done Starting Lpbk Proxy.......................Done Starting CDI..............................Done Starting CAM I/f..........................Done Starting MME..............................Done Starting EtherBridge......................Done Starting ARP Conflict Detection...........Done Starting DHCP Relay Agent.................Done Starting Peer ARP Proxy Agent.............Done Starting Host ARP Proxy Agent.............Done Starting Mobile IP Proxy Agent............Done Starting LLC Proxy........................Done Selecting Config Data Source as BTS ......Done Initializing SNMP Agent ..................Done Loading BLLC..............................Done Pinging EMS (172.16.100.9)................Done Loading MTMG..............................Done Loading MDSW..............................Done Loading MBSW..............................Done Loading CAP...............................Done Loading AUX_..............................Done Loading BLLC..............................Done Loading MTMG..............................Done Loading MDSW..............................Done Loading MBSW..............................Done 98 Part #40-00047-07 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 9, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 3 Loading CAP...............................Done Loading BAUX..............................Done Loading BMCB..............................Done Loading MACA..............................Done Loading MACB..............................Done Loading CHAD..............................Done Loading CHTT..............................Done Loading CDSW..............................Done Loading BDSC..............................Done Loading CHSL..............................Done Loading CHMA..............................Done Loading AUX_..............................Done Loading LLC...............................Done Stopping LLC Proxy........................Done Evaluating bootload status................Done Initializing DSP(s).......................Done Starting LLC Proxy........................Done Starting LLC Proxy........................Done Updating Slot Table.......................Done Configuring LLC Bandwidth Management......Done Configuring MAC Carrier Data..............Done Configuring MAC Bandwidth Management......Done Configuring Layer 1.......................Done Configuring CPE Descriptor Table .........Done Starting LLC Proxy........................Done Configuring Diag Feature(s)...............Done Configuring GPS...........................Done
!!!!!!!! BTS Initialization Complete !!!!!!!!!
Z (TM) NNNN ZZZ NNNNNN ZZZZZ N N i i NNNNNNNN ZZZZZZ NN N NNNNNNNNNN ZZZZZZ N N N aaa v v i n nn i NNNNNNNNNNNN ZZZZZZ N N N a v v i nn n i NNNNNN NNNNNN ZZZZZZ N N N aaaa v v i n n i NNNNNN NNNNNN ZZZZZZ ZZ N NN a a v v i n n i NNNNNN Z NNNNNN ZZZZZZZZZZ N N aaaa v i n n i NNNNNN ZZZ NNNNNN ZZZZZZZZZ NNNNNN ZZZZZ NNNNNN ZZZZZZZ N E T W O R K S (TM) NNNNNNN ZZZZZZ NNNNN ZZZZZZ NNNNNNNNN ZZZZZZ NNN ZZZZZZ NNNNNNNNNN ZZZZZZ N ZZZZZZ Internet at the Speed of Thought (TM) NN NNNNNN ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZ NNNNNN ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZ Copyright(c)Navini Networks,Inc.2000-2002 NNNNNN ZZZZZZZZZZZZ Copyright(c)Conexant,Inc. 2000-2001 NNNNNN ZZZZZZZZZZ Copyright(c)Free Sw Foundation,Inc.1988-1999 NNNNNN ZZZZZZZZ Copyright(c)NComm, Inc.1997-2001 NNNN ZZZZZZ Copyright(c)RSA Data Security,Inc.1991-1992 NNN ZZZZ Copyright(c)SNMP Research,Inc.1989-1999 N ZZ Copyright(c)Texas Instruments,Inc.2000-2001 Copyright(c)Wind River Systems,Inc.1984-2000 KERNEL : 5.4(WIND version 2.5) BSP : 1.0/RW1.19.1.3 CPU: CC (PPC860P). Processor #0. Memory Size: 0x3f80000. WDB: Ready. Last reset caused by a user request from the console. Current time is FRI JAN 10 14:38:36 2003 bts-120 [Active]% TimerHandler called for port /tty/2
--> 1/10/2003 14:38:38 Position fix: latitude: 32:58:42, longitude: -96:42:4, height: 188.78 Part #40-00047-07 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 9, 2003 99 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 3 Navini Networks, Inc. Calibrate the Base Station Calibrating the Base Station detects the phase differential between the antennas and matches the output power across all antennas in the RFS. The calibration procedure must be performed at least three times to verify consistency of the returned values. Ensure that the BTS has been powered on with the power amplifiers on for at least fifteen minutes to allow them time to warm up and stabilize. Calibration Procedure To calibrate the BTS, follow the steps in the procedure below. Refer to the Ripwave Configuration Guide, as needed. Step 1. On the Test EMS, click on the Server icon to start the EMS Server. Step 2. Click on the EMS Configuration icon to start the EMS Client GUI. Step 3. At the EMS Configuration & Alarm Manager login screen, enter the user name and password. The defaults are emsAdmin / emsAdmin. Step 4. Verify that Antenna Power, RX Sensitivity, and Cal Cable Loss values are entered in the fields in the EMS. NOTE: The Power Splitter Loss was entered when you performed the RFS configuration earlier. Step 5. Click on the BTS that is being installed to select it. Right-click on the highlighted BTS and select Action > Configure. Refer to Figure 51. Figure 51: Select BTS 100 Part #40-00047-07 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 9, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 3 Step 6. Click on Air Interface > Layer 1, and then click Calibrate. In the resulting dialog box
(Figure 52), select FULL CALIBRATION and Calibrate. Figure 52: Calibrate BTS Step 7. When the Warning window appears (Figure 53), click Yes. Figure 53: Warning Window Step 8. The Full Calibration window appears during system calibration (Figure 54). When calibration is complete, the Full Calibration window changes and displays the finish time and the result. Click the Close button to close the Full Calibration window. Note that the result of Done does not mean that the system passed calibration. Part #40-00047-07 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 9, 2003 101 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 3 Figure 54: Full Calibration Window Navini Networks, Inc. Step 9. Click Show Configuration and select the Antenna Table tab (Figure 55). Check the Tx Gain and Rx Gain columns (the last two columns in the table) for transmit and receive results. The transmit and receive results for all the eight antennas must be between 1 and 254. The eight values in each column should be relatively close to each other. A value of zero indicates a problem with the associated antenna path. Figure 55: Show Configuration/Antenna Table 102 Part #40-00047-07 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 9, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 3 Step 10. Perform the calibration function two more times. Ensure each time that the values remain relatively stable (+/- 3), and that none of the results is zero. After you perform the second calibration, click on Configure. The Config Layer 1 Data window (Figure 56) shows the data from the second calibration. The values in the main screen from the Show Config selection are from the first calibration. Compare the values from the two calibrations to ensure that they are stable, and not equal to zero. Figure 56: Config Layer 1 Data Window Step 11. Close the Config Layer 1 Data window. Update the main screen by clicking the Show Configuration button. Part #40-00047-07 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 9, 2003 103 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 3 Perform the Calibration Verification Procedure Base Station Calibration Verification is a set of procedures to verify that the equipment has passed calibration and that the RF portion of the equipment is operating within acceptable parameters. The results of the tests should be documented in the Base Station Calibration Verification Form, P/N 40-00059-00. This form, along with the procedure and form instructions, may be found in Appendix V. Single Antenna Test The object of the RFS Single Antenna Test is to verify the functionality of each antenna element in the Ripwave Radio Frequency Subsystem (RFS). The 8 antenna elements work together to create the beamforming that results from using a Smart Antenna - Phased Array technology. Using 8 combined single antenna elements creates the beamed radiation that is part of what constitutes the gain of up to 18 dB during transmission of data. In order to verify the correct beamforming and that each single antenna is working properly, we have to turn off the individual PA that controls each antenna element, one at a time. The Single Antenna Test should be performed after completing the Base Station Calibration Verification procedure. This test is necessary since an equipment calibration does not check the functionality of the RFS, and the Calibration Verification only searches for losses in the RFS, not RFS functionality. More specifically, the Single Antenna Test checks the following:
1. Low Noise Amplifier (LNA) at the RFS. LNAs are an integral part of the smart antenna technology. 2. Power Amplifiers. There is one PA for each antenna element, for a total of 8. Each PA converts IF to RF and vice versa and amplifies the signal before transmission and after reception. 3. Modulations. As each antenna element is checked, the variable modulations are checked. The higher the modulation, the higher the power and the better the data rate. The test ensures that all modulations possible, i.e., QPSK, 8PSK, and QAM16, are working properly. Export BTS Data Once you complete the calibration verification, export the BTS configuration data to a text file. This is done by highlighting the specific BTS in the Configuration and Alarms Manager (CAM) window, and on the Main Menu select File > Export BTS Data. This saves the configuration information if needed for later retrieval. 104 Part #40-00047-07 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 9, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 3 Perform Local Modem Tests Local wireline, then over-the-air, Modem testing will verify that the Base Station is working properly and is able transmit and receive data. Data rates are not being checked at this time. Refer to Appendix W to set up and perform the Local Modem procedures. Install & Test Customer EMS Operations If you have been using a Test EMS up to this point, you will now need to install and test the customers EMS server. This involves installing the EMS Server and Client on a computer that is connected through the system backhaul. When connecting the Ripwave equipment to the backhaul, refer to the Regulatory Information in Chapter 1, Page 8 specifically regarding cabling to Ethernet or T1 backhauls. Ethernet connections require a UL497B listed protection device to be installed between the BTS and the first network device. T1 connections must be routed from the BTS through a UL497 listed protection device at the demarcation point. The interconnect cables for T1 backhauls must be a minimum #26 AWG wire, in accordance with NEC/CEC standards. If the customers EMS is already installed and has been used for testing purposes, skip to the Verify System Performance section of this chapter. Install EMS Software The EMS software installation procedures can be found in the EMS Software Installation Guide, P/N 40-00017-00. After installing the EMS Server and Client applications, the EMS needs to be configured with the settings that are designated for the Base Station. The settings are found in the Network Architecture Plan provided by the customer. Ensure connection between the Base Station and the backhaul. The connection to the Base Station will be either an Ethernet connection or T1 connections. Verify EMS to Base Station Connectivity Follow the steps below to ensure the EMS and Base Station can communicate. Step 1. Open a Command Prompt window on the computer where the EMS is installed. Step 2. Ping the Base Station using the CLI command ping <base station ip address>. Verify that a reply from the Base Station is received. Part #40-00047-07 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 9, 2003 105 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 3 Perform Calibration Using Customers EMS This step is necessary only if you have been using a Test EMS up to this point. You will need to install the customers EMS server and software. Calibrate the Base Station using the customers EMS. Follow the same calibration procedures described earlier in this chapter, Calibrate the Base Station. Perform the procedure three times and make sure that the results are stable (+/3). Verify System Performance Drive Study The preliminary Drive Study is performed if no RF coverage model is available. The Drive Study helps you to map out the coverage area. Later, the full Drive Study is performed to see if the systems coverage area is as predicted and, if necessary, to fine-tune the RF model. Following the detailed Drive Study procedures in Appendix X, you will perform a preliminary Drive Study by driving back and forth through a sector, staying on major roads about a kilometer apart. Special attention has to be paid to the null and fringe areas. You will follow this scheme for each sector in the site, recording the results of all tests. The test results will be sent for evaluation, along with the Location (FTP) test results, to Navini Networks Technical Support. If the results are not adequate, Technical Support will have you adjust some of the RF parameters and perform the Drive Study again. Location (FTP) Test Location Tests are performed to see if the system file transfer functions are working as predicted between CPE and Base Station. These are conducted in stages as well. The first stage is the preliminary Location Test, where you perform three uploads and three downloads at three locations with the Base Station in line-of-sight (LOS). Then you perform three uploads and three downloads at three locations with the Base Station in non-line-of-sight (NLOS). For the NLOS testing, you will need to find an obstacle, such as a building, between the CPE and Base Station. Results are sent, along with the preliminary Drive Study results, to Navini Networks Technical Support for evaluation. If the results are not adequate - i.e., file transfers do not meet customers objectives - Technical Support will have you adjust some of the RF parameters and perform the Location tests again. The detailed Location Test procedures and form are located in Appendix Y. To summarize, these are the high-level steps for verifying system performance:
1. Conduct preliminary Drive Study (if no RF coverage map is available). 2. Conduct preliminary LOS Location Tests. 3. Conduct preliminary NLOS Location Tests. 106 Part #40-00047-07 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 9, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 3 4. Send all test results to Navinis Technical Support for evaluation. 5. If directed by Technical Support, adjust RF parameters. 6. Conduct full Drive Study. 7. Conduct full LOS Location Tests. 8. Conduct full NLOS Location Tests. 9. Send all test results to Navinis Technical Support for evaluation. The cycle continues until the performance objectives are reached. Verify System Operation With Multiple Modems Set up three computers with Modems connected to them. Perform file transfers from all three computers to verify Base Station operation. Back Up EMS Database After all system installation and commissioning activities are complete, perform a backup of the EMS database. The procedure can be found in the EMS Administration Guide. Place the backup files on a different system server where they will be periodically backed up on a tape drive. Customer Acceptance To conclude the installation and commissioning activities, gather all of the required documents and forms from the installation and commissioning procedures to create a comprehensive system I&C package. Refer to Appendix Z for a summary of the documentation package. The customer and Navini Networks will sign the Customer Acceptance Form. A copy of this form is provided in Appendix AA. The signed form and the system I &C package are provided to the customer. The original, signed Customer Acceptance Form and system I &C package are stored in the Navini Networks Technical Support database. Part #40-00047-07 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 9, 2003 107 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 3 Navini Networks, Inc. 108 Part #40-00047-07 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 9, 2003
1 | Chapter1 | Users Manual | 1.09 MiB | October 12 2003 |
Ripwave Base Station Installation & Commissioning Guide Part Number 40-00047-01 Revision F (TTA), Version 1.0 October 23, 2003 Proprietary All information disclosed by this document is the proprietary property of Navini Networks, Inc. and is protected by copyright, trademark, and/or trade secret laws. All rights therein are expressly reserved. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 1 Navini Networks, Inc. About This Document Purpose This document provides a Navini-certified Installation & Commissioning Technician or Field Engineer with instructions to properly install the Base Transceiver Station (BTS), Radio Frequency Subsystem (RFS), and cabling;
and to test and commission the Base Station after installation. Revision History Authors Editors Comments Date 2001 Revision/
Version A/1.0 4.02 8.30.02 9.3.02 9.27.02 10.18.02 2.7.03 2.28.03 4.4.03 7.30.03 9.12.03 9.27.03 B/v1.0 C/1.0 C/1.0 C/1.0 C/1.0 D/1.0 D/1.0 D/1.0 E/1.0 F/1.0 F/1.0 J. Price, C. Keltner, A.Chua, P. Blain, J. Coulson, D. Karina, K. Sharp, L. Hoffman Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same + R. Hernandez E. Curl, M. Johnson J. Coulson + L. Font D. Karina, E. Condon 10.04.03 F/1.0 H. Bhakta, Mitch Johnson L.Font 10.09.03 F/1.0 10.23.03 F/1.0 J.Coulson, P.Prudhomme, L.Font L.Font L.Font 2 N/A Draft Preliminary Prepare for release 1.16 N/A N/A S. Redfoot Review comments from class 8.30.02 Same Preliminary Commercial Release 1.18 Feedback on forms and specifications Same Combined all Base Station I&C into Same one manual; Preliminary 1.19 Standard Release 1.19 File Mngtchanges, no content change Standard Release 1.20 Same Same Same L. Font S. Redfoot
& L. Font Draft updates for TTA trials UL & TTA updates; TOC, Grounding diagrams (Fig 1, 2, 3), Flow Diagram, Technical Specs Table, inclinometer Changes required for UL compliance. 2.4 TTA and 3.5 TTA tables added to Appx O. Page and TOC renumbering. Consolidated changes after Oct 9 review. Plurals of acronyms. Some drawing updates pending from the Oct 9 review. Magnetic Declination charts update. Part #40-00047-01 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 1 Contacts Contact Navini Networks Technical Support during normal business hours: Monday through Friday 8:30 a.m. to 5:30 p.m. Central Time. You can also submit questions or comments by web or email at any time. Corporate Headquarters:
Technical Support:
Local Number:
Web Address:
E-mail:
Navini Networks, Inc. 2240 Campbell Creek Blvd. Suite 110 Richardson, Texas 75082 USA
(972) 852-4200 1-866-RIPWAVE
(972) 852-4389 www.navini.com / select Technical Support techsupport@navini.com Part #40-00047-01 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 3 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 1 Navini Networks, Inc. Permissions, Trademarks & Distribution Copyright September 2003, Navini Networks, Inc. All information contained herein and disclosed by this document is the proprietary property of Navini Networks, Inc. and all rights therein are expressly reserved. Acceptance of this material signifies agreement by the recipient that the information contained in this document is confidential and that it will be used solely for the purposes set forth herein. Acceptance of this material signifies agreement by the recipient that it will not be used, reproduced in whole or in part, disclosed, distributed, or conveyed to others in any manner or by any means graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, taping, or information storage and retrieval systems without the express written permission of Navini Networks, Inc. Navini Networks, Internet at the Speed of Thought, zero-install, unwired by Navini, the Navini Networks logo, and Ripwave are trademarks of Navini Networks, Inc. Other product and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks and/or service marks of their respective owners. Nothing herein constitutes any representation, warranty, assurance, or guaranty of any kind. Because of continuing developments and improvements in design, manufacturing, and deployment, material in this document is subject to change without notification and does not represent any commitment or obligation on the part of Navini Networks, Inc. Navini Networks, Inc. shall have no liability for any error or damages resulting from the use of this document. Any unauthorized usage is strictly prohibited without the express written permission of Navini Networks, Inc. Copyright ? 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Navini Networks, Inc. 2240 Campbell Creek Boulevard Suite 110 Richardson, Texas 75082 USA 4 Part #40-00047-01 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS About This Document Permissions, Trademarks & Distribution Table of Contents Safety Regulatory Information Battery Caution & Procedures Glossary of Terms & Abbreviations CHAPTER 1: OVERVIEW RIPWAVE DESCRIPTION PROCEDURAL DOCUMENTS & FORMS HIGH-LEVEL I&C PROCESS FLOWCHART BASE STATION COMPONENTS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BTS INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION PRE-INSTALLATION INSTALL POWER & GROUNDING INSTALL CABLES INSTALL THE BTS INSTALL GPS ANTENNAS INSTALL THE RFS VERIFY INSTALLED CIRCUIT CARDS BASE STATION INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION CHAPTER 3: COMMISSIONING REVIEW CUSTOMER NETWORK PLANS INSTALL EMS SERVER VERIFY CABLE CONNECTIONS CONFIGURE & POWER UP THE BTS CALIBRATE THE BASE STATION PERFORM THE CALIBRATION VERIFICATION PROCEDURE SINGLE ANTENNA TEST EXPORT BTS DATA PERFORM LOCAL MODEM TESTS INSTALL & TEST CUSTOMER EMS OPERATIONS PERFORM CALIBRATION USING CUSTOMERS EMS VERIFY SYSTEM PERFORMANCE VERIFY SYSTEM OPERATION WITH MULTIPLE MODEMS BACK UP EMS DATABASE CUSTOMER ACCEPTANCE 2 4 5 6 7 10 11 20 21 23 23 34 38 39 41 41 45 48 55 60 61 73 74 75 75 75 76 77 100 104 104 104 104 105 106 106 107 107 107 Part #40-00047-01 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 5 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 1 Navini Networks, Inc. BTS OUTDOOR ENCLOSURES GUIDE RECTIFIER/BATTERY BACKUP SPECIFICATIONS SAMPLE BASE STATION DRAWING SAMPLE STATEMENT OF WORK (SOW) SAMPLE RESPONSIBILITY ASSIGNMENT MATRIX (RAM) SAMPLE WORK BREAKDOWN STRUCTURE (WBS) SITE CANDIDATE EVALUATION FORM INTERFERENCE SWEEP PROCEDURE INTERFERENCE SWEEP TOOL BTS SPECIFICATIONS APPENDICES A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H: RFS DATA SHEETS I:
J:
K:
L: ANTENNA POWER & CABLE SELECTION PROCEDURE & FORM M:
N:
O: RFS SYSTEM TEST (CABLE SWEEP) P:
Q:
R:
S:
T:
U:
V:
W: LOCAL MODEM TEST PROCEDURES X: DRIVE STUDY PROCEDURE & FORM Y:
Z:
AA: CUSTOMER ACCEPTANCE FORM BTS CHASSIS ALARMS SAMPLE TRI-SECTORED BTS GROUNDING DRAWING SAMPLE TRI-SECTORED BTS POWER DRAWING SINGLE ANTENNA TEST PROCEDURE BASE STATION INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION FORM EXCEL CONFIGURATION FORM BASE STATION CALIBRATION VERIFICATION PROCEDURE & FORM LOCATION (FTP) TEST PROCEDURE & FORM SITE INSTALLATION CLOSE-OUT DOCUMENTATION SAMPLE BILL OF MATERIALS INSTALL CONNECTORS ON CABLES PROCEDURE 109 113 121 123 135 141 147 155 159 161 163 165 171 175 181 203 205 207 209 217 221 243 251 257 263 271 275 6 Part #40-00047-01 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 1 Safety To optimize safety and expedite installation and service, read this document thoroughly. Follow all warnings, cautions, and instructions marked on the equipment and included in this document. To aid in the prevention of injury and damage to property, cautionary symbols have been placed in this document to alert the reader to known potentially hazardous situations, or hazards to equipment or procedures. The symbols are placed before the information to which they apply. However, any situation that involves heavy equipment and electricity can become hazardous, and caution and safety should be practiced at all times when installing, servicing, or operating the equipment. Caution Symbol - possible equipment or property damage Warning Symbol - could cause personal injury or otherwise be hazardous to your health Navini Networks, Inc., expressly requires that when using Navini electronic equipment always follow the basic safety precautions to reduce the risk of electrical shock, fire, and injury to people and/or property. 1. Follow all warnings and instructions that come with the equipment. 2. Do not use the equipment while you are in a bathtub, shower, pool, or spa. Exposure of the equipment to water could cause severe electrical shock or serious damage to the equipment. 3. Do not allow any type of liquid to come in contact with the equipment. Unplug the equipment from the power source before cleaning. Use a damp cloth for cleaning. Do not use any soaps or liquid cleaners. 4. Follow all airport and FAA regulations when using the equipment on or near aircraft. 5. Only operate the equipment from the type of power source(s) indicated in this manual (110 VAC or Navini supplied battery). Any other type of input power source may cause damage to the equipment. 6. Power the equipment using only the battery or the AC adapter cable provided, and in accordance with the instructions specified in the User Guide. 7. Do not use a frayed or damaged power cord. Do not place the power cord where it can be 8. Do not touch wires where the insulation is frayed or worn unless the equipment has been stepped on or tripped over. disconnected from its power source. 9. Do not overload wall outlets, power strips, or extension cords. This can cause serious 10. Do not place the equipment on an unstable surface. It can fall and cause injury or damage to electrical shock or fire. the equipment. Part #40-00047-01 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 7 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 1 Navini Networks, Inc. 11. Do not disassemble the equipment. Removing covers exposes dangerous voltages or other risks and also voids the warranty. Incorrect reassembly can cause equipment damage or electrical shock. Only an authorized repair technician should service this product. 12. Do not expose the equipment to extreme hot or cold temperatures. 13. Do not use the equipment under the following conditions:
?? When the equipment has been exposed to water or moisture.
?? When the equipment has been damaged.
?? When the power cord is damaged or frayed.
?? When the equipment does not operate properly or shows a distinct change in performance. 8 Part #40-00047-01 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 1 Regulatory Information FCC Notice WARNING! This device is a Radio Frequency transmitter. It is required to comply with FCC RF exposure requirements for transmitting devices. A minimum separation distance of 2 meter or more must be maintained between the antenna and all persons during device operations to ensure compliance with the FCCs rules for Radio Frequency Exposure. If this minimum distance cannot be maintained, exposure to RF levels that exceed the FCCs limits may result. INFORMATION TO USER This device has been authorized as a radio frequency transmitter under the appropriate rules of the Federal Communications Commission. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by Navini Networks could void the users authority to operate the equipment. UL & NEC/CEC Regulations 1. The Ripwave BTS must be installed in accordance with NEC/CEC Articles 800/810/830. 2. As a minimum, all DC power leads and bonding/grounding straps shall be 6 AWG copper conductors. 3. GPS, RF, and power/data cables in excess of 140 feet in length must have protective devices installed that are UL listed to UL 492, UL497A or UL497B, UL497C, and UL1449. 4. If lightning protection is required, the device(s) must comply with UL497. 5. Power supplies should be UL listed to UL60950 or UL60950-1 and have earthed SELV output. 6. Ethernet connections require a UL497B listed protection device to be installed between the BTS and the first network device. T1 connections must be routed from the BTS through a UL497 listed protection device at the demarcation point. 7. T1 interconnect cables between the BTS and demarcation point must be a minimum of
#26 AWG wire, in accordance with NEC/CEC standards. 8. All power and ground conductors must be mechanically supported to avoid strain of the wires and connection points. 9. A UL listed disconnect device, such as a circuit breaker or fuse, must be installed between the power supply and BTS chassis connections. 10. Power-interconnect wires between the power supply/recitifier and the BTS Digital chassis must have heat shrink tubing applied over the barrel of the terminal lugs after crimping the wire. A picture is provided in the Installation section of this manual. 11. If it is necessary to replace a fuse on a CHP, CC or PA board, a fuse of the same type and with the same rating must be used to insure continued protection against risk of fire. Part #40-00047-01 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 9 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 1 Battery Caution & Procedures WARNING! To reduce risk of injury or fire, follow these instructions when handling the battery. 1. Risk of explosion is possible if the battery is replaced with one not supplied by Navini 2. Do not dispose of the battery in a fire. It may explode. Check with the local codes for Networks. battery disposal guidelines. 3. Do not open or mutilate the battery. The battery contains substances that are toxic, corrosive, or harmful to humans. If battery substances come in contact with the skin, seek medical help immediately. 4. Do not attempt to recharge the battery by any means except per the instructions in this manual. 5. Remove the battery from the equipment if the equipment is not going to be used for a long period of time. The battery could leak and cause damage to the equipment. 6. Exercise care when handling the battery to prevent shorting the battery with conducting materials such as bracelets, rings, and keys. 7. Store the battery pack in a dry place, 0 to +40 degrees Celsius. 8. Dispose of used batteries according to environmental guidelines. 10 Part #40-00047-01 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 1 Glossary of Terms & Abbreviations Term 802.11 Stands For.... 802.11 Standard ACC ACK AP Access Channel or Access Code Channel Acknowledge Access Point AMI Alternate Mark Inversion ARP Address Resolution Protocol ARQ Automatic Repeat reQuest ASYNCH Asynchronous AWG ATM B8ZS BB BBU BCC BoM BS American Wire Gauge Asynchronous Transfer Mode Biploar 8-Zero Substitution Broadband Battery Backup Unit Broadcast Code (or Control) Channel Bill of Materials Base Station BTS Base Transceiver Station BW Bandwidth BYTE Byte Meaning An IEEE LAN standard for wireless Ethernet replacement technology in the ISM band. Runs at up to 10 Mbps. AKA, Paging Channel. The signal path that tells a mobile to prepare for an incoming call. Positive message sent by a protocol to acknowledge reception of a transmitted packet Wireless LAN transceiver that acts as a center point of an all-
wireless network or as a connection point between wireless and wired networks. Old method for encoding data on a 64 kbps channel, which requires 8 kbps to maintain synchronization, leaving only 56 kbps available to transmit data The function of the ARP is to match higher-level network IP addresses with the physical hardware address of a piece of equipment. A protocol for error control in data transmission that automatically requests the transmitter to resend a packet when the receiver detects an error in the packet. Not occurring at regular intervals, as in data piped over a network A measure of thickness of copper, aluminum or other wiring in the U.S. Transporting a broad range of user data at irregular intervals over network facilities An encoding method used on T1 circuits that inserts two successive ones of the same voltage - referred to as a bipolar violation - into a signal whenever eight consecutive zeros are transmitted. RF system with constant data rate of 1.5 Mbps or higher. Equipment used to keep a BTS operating in the event of a power outage A channel of data transmitted by one entity and received by many devices. List of the actual equipment to be manufactured and shipped to the installation site. Network Access equipment and software that transmits and receives, as well as processes, voice or data calls from mobile units to network connections. A Ripwave Base Station consists of the Base Transceiver Station (BTS) and the Radio Frequency Subsystem (RFS), or antenna, plus a Global Positioning System (GPS) antenna for timing. The Ripwave BTS is a two-shelf rack that holds the RF modules and digital circuit cards that interpret radio signals into computer language and sends messages to and from the local or wide area network. It functions between the RFS and the EMS to handle the signaling. Frequency spectrum usable for data transfers. It describes the maximum data rate that a signal can attain on the medium without encountering significant loss of power. Usually expressed in bits per second (digital) or Hertz (analog). 8 bits Part #40-00047-01 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 11 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 1 Navini Networks, Inc. Compact Disk - Read Only Memory See CD. If a CD is not Read Only, computers can write data 1Compact Disk or 2Change Directory 1An optical disk capable of storing large amounts of data (700x Term CAM Stands For.... 1Configuration & Alarm Manager or 2Content Addressable Memory CBR Constant Bit Rate 1Communications Controller or 2Cross-check CDMA Code Division Multiple Access Cell Delay Variation Tolerance Channel Processor Card Command Line Interface Common Object Request Broker Agent Customer Premise Equipment D4 dB Decibel dBd Decibel/Dipole CC CD CD-ROM CDVT CHP CLEC CLI CORBA CPE D4 Meaning 1An EMS functionality that is handled through a Graphical User Interface for purposes of configuring elements in the system and handling other OAM requirements. 2Module of the BTS software used to provide mappings of users to channels. One of the two service categories available for the Management PVC in the ATM/T1 BTS configuration (the other one is UBR) 1A type of circuit card that resides in the Digital shelf of the Ripwave BTS. It handles all interfaces between BTS and network. 2An EMS functionality that allows the system to perform an automated sanity check of the datafill. floppy disk). It can be inserted into most PCs and read to load files onto a computer 2A software programming term in C language that tells the computer to go to a different location in the computers memory. Digital cellular technology that uses a spread-spectrum technique where individual conversations are encoded with a random digital sequence. Increases capacity and speed of communications messages between mobile units over other types of wireless networks. to it with that capability. Delay variation parameter required by UBR and CBR. A card in the digital shelf of the BTS that performs the first stage of signal processing for up to 4 antennae. One Navini 2.4 GHz BTS has 8 antennae. The card performs digital-to-analog conversion (DAC) and analog-to-digital conversion (ADC) for up to 10 carriers. Exchange Carrier (LEC). A text -based programming language through which a user communicates with an operating system or an application. A standard for Network Management Systems that allows integration with NMS regardless of programming language or Operating System. Communications equipment that resides at the customers location. A framing standard for traditional time-division multiplexing, which standard describes user channels multiplexed onto a trunk that has been segmented (framed) into 24 bytes of 8 bits each. (See also ESF.) Unit of measurement for sound. A logarithmic expression of the ratio between two signal power, voltage, or current levels. A decibel is one-tenth of a Bel, a seldom-used unit named for Alexander Graham Bell, inventor of the telephone. A ratio, measured in decibels, of the effective gain of an antenna compared to a dipole antenna (2 horizontal rods in line with each other). The greater the dBd value the higher the gain and therefore the more acute the angle of coverage. Competitive Local Exchange Carrier A telephone company that competes with an incumbent Local 12 Part #40-00047-01 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 1 Digital Signal Processing/Processor Compressing or manipulating analog signals to digital signals Term dBi Stands For.... Decibel/Isotropic DHCP DiffServ Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Differentiated Service DIR DL DNS DS-1 DSL DSP EID EMS enet ERP ESF FCC FE FEC Directory DownLink Domain Name Server Digital Signal - 1 Digital Subscriber Line Equipment Identifier Element Management System Ethernet Effective Radiated Power Extended Superframe Federal Communications Commission Far End 1Forward Error Correction or 2Fast Ethernet Controller FTP File Transfer Protocol Meaning A ratio, measured in decibels, of the effective gain of an antenna compared to an isotropic antenna (measured along axes in all directions). The greater the dBi value the higher the gain and therefore the more acute the angle of coverage. A protocol for dynamically assigning IP addresses to devices on a network. Different Quality of Service (QoS) descriptions for different types of traffic, i.e., voice, video, email. The DiffServ table is where each level of QoS is defined. Equivalent to Class of Service (COS) in POTS. A special kind of file used to organize other files into a hierarchical structure. In this case, data messages transmitted from the BTS to the CPE. TCP/IP networking term that is a protocol for matching objects to network (IP) addresses. Also T1 or E1. Digital transmission equipment that can handle up to 1.544 Mbps. A type of service whereby users gain access to the Internet through high-speed data networks. and vice-versa. Field in EMS for assigning IP address or name to individual pieces of equipment for purposes of configuring the system. An application that allows the user to define and manipulate managed objects as a system within an overall network. The most widely-installed local area network (LAN) technology. Ethernet is specified in the IEEE 802.3 standard and typically uses coaxial cable or special grade of twisted pair wires. The actual power in Watts radiated from a transmitters antenna. In T-carrier, a synchronization frame that delineates 24 DS1 frames Note: ESF requires less frequent synchronization than the T-carrier D4 superframe format. (See also D4.) United States government regulatory agency that supervises, licenses and otherwise controls electronic and electromagnetic transmission standards. A relative term that refers to the receiving element in a network, as opposed to the near-end element that is transmitting data. 1A system of error control for data transmission wherein the receiving device has the capability to detect and correct any character or code block that contains fewer than a predetermined number of symbols in error. 2A process created and attached during BTS booting for the 10/100 Ethernet ports on the BTS. A TCP/IP method consisting of a client and server and used to transfer files between two or more sites or elements in a network. Part #40-00047-01 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 13 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 1 Navini Networks, Inc. Term Gain Gb GB GHz GPS GUI HW Hz I&C IEC IF IMA inet IP ISM ISP Kb KB KHz L1 L2 Stands For.... Gain Gigabit Gigabyte Gigahertz Global Positioning System Graphical User Interface Hardware Hertz Installation & Commissioning Inter-exchange Carrier Interface Card Inverse Multiplexing over ATM Internet Internet Protocol Industrial, Scientific and Medical Internet Service Provider Kilobit Kilobyte Kilohertz Layer 1 Layer 2 L3 Layer 3 LAN Local Area Network Meaning Ratio of the output amplitude of a signal to the input amplitude of a signal, expressed in decibels (dB). One billion (1,000,000,000) bits. One billion (1,000,000,000) bytes. One billion (1,000,000,000) hertz - cycles per second. Ultra high frequency (UHF) signals, including microwave signals. A constellation of 24 well-spaced satellites that orbit the earth and enable users with GPS antennas to pinpoint their exact geographical position. A graphic rather than purely text based user interface to a computer or computing system. Physical, tangible equipment 1 cycle per second. Term used to describe the procedures of physically installing technical equipment then powering up the equipment to make sure it will operate (to put it into commission). Also IXC. Public switching network service provider (carrier) that connects across and between local exchange carriers
(LEC). Card on the digital shelf of the Ripwave BTS that takes the analog signal from the Channel Processor card (CHP) and converts it to a baseband signal before sending it on to the RF modules for transmission (forward link), and vice-versa
(reverse link). A method of building dynamic routes of 2 or more T1s to increase bandwidth so that PVCs can share the IMA resources, as needed, for data transmissions. A worldwide system of computer networks in which users at any one computer can, if they have permission, get information from any other computer (and sometimes talk directly to users at other computers.) A TCP/IP protocol used to route data from its source to its destination. Unlicensed band around 2.4 MHz A company that provides access to the Internet. 1,024 bits 1,024 bytes 1,000 hertz. Physical Layer. Part of the OSI rules and standards for network management. L1 describes the physical layer, or electrical and mechanical port-to-port connections, in the network. Data Link Layer. Part of the OSI rules and standards for network management. L2 describes the data link layer where data is set up and torn down in a specific format (frames), through the overall network. Also responsible for detecting and correcting errors by requesting retransmission. Network Layer. Part of the OSI rules and standards for network management. L3 describes the network addressing that gets data to its destination within the network, i.e., IP addressing. A data network of interconnected computers, servers, printers, and other peripherals that communicate at high speeds over short distances, usually within the same building. Also allows for sharing of resources. 14 Part #40-00047-01 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 1 Term LCP LDF LED LLC Stands For.... Link Control Protocol Light-emitting Diode Logical Link Controller LMR LOS Line-of-sight MAC Media Access Control Mb MB Mbps MCBS MDM MHz MIB MMDS MME NE NEC NF NIC Megabit Megabyte Megabits Per Second Multi-Carrier Beam Forming Synchronized Modem Card Megahertz Management Information Base Multipoint Multi-channel Distribution Service 1Near-end or 2Network Element National Electrical Code Noise Floor Network Interface Card NLOS Non Line-of-site NMS Network Management System NOC Network Operations Center Meaning Basis of the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) scheme for negotiating and establishing connections. see p.45 An electronic device that lights up when electricity passes through it. Often used to indicate equipment or system state. A protocol that governs the transition of frames between data stations regardless of how the medium is shared. Its the upper sub-layer that further defines the Media Access Control (MAC) protocol. It provides the basis for an unacknowledged connectionless service on a LAN - i.e., error correction, multiplexing, broadcasting. see p.45 Describes laser, microwave, RF, and infrared transmission systems that require no obstruction in a direct path between the transmitter and the receiver. Protocol that governs access to a network in order to transmit data between nodes. In a wireless LAN, the MAC is the radio controller protocol (L2). One million (1,000,000) bits. One million bytes. Literally - 1,048,576 bytes. Transmission speed at rate of one million bytes per second. Multiple Access technology used by Navini Ripwave systems A card in the Navini BTS that converts digital signals into analog so the signals can be transmitted over telephone lines, and vice-
versa. Modem stands for modulator/demodulator. One million (1,000,000) hertz - cycles per second. Normally used to refer to how fast a microprocessor can execute instructions. A collection of managed objects used in SNMP-based networks. MIBs carry information in a standard format so external tools can analyze network management and performance. Fixed wireless, high-speed local service that operates at 2.1 - 2.7 GHz. Speed 10 Mbps. Originally conceived for cable TV service. see p.92 1The transmitting end, versus the receiving end, of a signal transmission. 2 A router, switch, or hub in an ISDN network. Official rules and regulations that apply to the installation of electrical equipment in the U.S. A computer circuit board or card that is installed in a computer so that it can be connected to a network. Network interface cards provide a dedicated, full-time connection to a network. Describes laser, microwave, RF, and infrared transmission systems that can penetrate obstructions in the path between the transmitter and the receiver. A product that helps manage a network generally hosted on a well-equipped computer such as an engineering workstation. The system tracks network statistics and resources. A centralized point, much like a traffic control tower, where technicians or engineers can monitor network activity, alarms, and statistics, as well as make network configuration and other changes dynamically. For Internet, the NOC is often a hub for ISP services. Part #40-00047-01 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 15 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 1 Navini Networks, Inc. Term OAM OS OSI OTA PA PC PCB PDU Ping PPPoE PRC Propagation PSK PSN PSTN PVC QAM QoS RAM Stands For.... Operation, Administration, Maintenance Operating System Meaning A set of network management functions. Also describes the human-machine interface tasks - i.e., to operate the system, to administer the system, and to maintain the system. A software program that manages the basic operation of a computer. Most Operating Systems are either based on Over-the-Air Printed Circuit Board Power Amplifier Personal Computer Packet Data Unit or Protocol Data Unit Ping Open Systems Interconnection An ISO model for worldwide communications that defines 7 layers of network protocol: L1 Physical Layer; L2 Data Link Layer; L3 Network Layer; L4 Transport Layer; L5 Session Layer; L6 Presentation Layer; L7 Application Layer. A standard for the transmission and reception of application-
related information in a wireless communications system. Any IBM-compatible computer, so named because IBMs first commercial end user computer was called a PC. A hardware module that holds electronic circuitry and usually fits into a larger frame where the various PCBs are interconnected electronically. A data packet. Refers to that which is exchanged between peer-
layer entities. Contains header, data, and trailer information. Generalized term from sonar science, where a short sound burst is sent out and an echo or ping is received. Used to determine if signals or packets have been dropped, duplicated, or reordered. A protocol that allows dial-up Internet connections. Includes the Link Control Protocol as well as Network Control Protocols. To spread out and affect a greater area; travel through space, as in radio waves. Digital transmission term that means an angle modulation where the phase of the carrier varies in relation to a reference or former phase. An encoded shift. Each change of phase carries one bit of information, where the bit rate equals the modulation rate. A network in which data is transferred in units called packets. Packets can be routed individually and reassembled to form a complete message at the definition. Typically used in the same context as POTS. Analogous to a network of major highways originally built by a single organization but added to and expanded by multiple organizations. AKA, backbone networks. A software-defined logical connection between end points in a network. Point-to-point Protocol Over Ethernet Peak Cell Rate Propagation Public Switched Telephone Network Packet Switched Network Private Virtual Circuit Phase Shift Keying Quadrature Amplitude Modulation A bandwidth conservation process routinely used in modems. Quality of Service 1Random Access Memory or 2Responsibility Assign Matrix RBW Resolution Band Width Creates higher throughput but decreased coverage area. A guaranteed throughput for critical network applications, such as Voice over IP. Term primarily used in an ATM environment. Five classes of service: Class 1 Video; Class 2 Audio; Class 3 Data Connection. 1Computer memory that can be accessed randomly. 2A document created during the BTS installation and Commissioning, defining who is responsible for performing each task. A parameter set on the spectrum analyzer during insertion loss measurements 16 Part #40-00047-01 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 1 Term RF RFS RH RMS RS RSSI Stands For.... Radio Frequency Radio Frequency Subsystem Relative Humidity Root mean Square Reed-Solomon Meaning A portion of the electromagnetic spectrum in the frequency range between audio and infrared: 100 KHz to 20 GHz. RF measurements are expressed in Hz (unit for measuring frequency); MHz = 1 Million Hz; GHz = 1 Billing Hz. A term for the antenna portion of the base station. The amount of water vapor in the air, given as the percent of saturation humidity, generally calculated in relation to saturated vapor density. The most common mathematical method of defining the effective voltage or current of an AC wave Reed-Solomon codes are block-based error correcting codes with a wide range of applications in digital communications. Receiver Signal Strength Indicator A term that describes the measure of the signal strength in Rx Receive S-CDMA SELV Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access Safety Extra Low Voltage SLIP Serial Line Internet Protocol SMDS SMS Switched Multi-megabit Data Service 1Short Message Service or 2Systems Management Server SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SNR Signal-to-noise Ratio SO/HO Small Office/Home Office SoW Statement of Work SSI SW SYN Signal Strength Indicator Software Synthesizer Card SYNCH Synchronous kilohertz or gigahertz between the transmission and the receiving end. An abbreviated way of expressing the term, receive, as in to receive a transmission. Wireless technology based on data being transferred at a fixed rate using Code Division Multiple Access algorithms. A secondary circuit which is designed and protected in such a way that, under normal operative conditions or under a single fault condition, its voltage does not exceed a safe value. A TCP/IP protocol used for communication between two machines that are previously configured for communication with each other. Connectionless service for MAN/WAN based on 53-byte packets that target the interconnection of different LANs into a public switched network at speeds higher than T1. 1A protocol that allows mobile users to send text -based messages from one device to another. The text appears on a devices screen and may be a maximum 160 characters in length. 2A Windows NT process that allows a network administrator to inventory all hardware and software on the network, then perform software distribution over the LAN. Standard management request-reply protocol for managing TCP/IP networks. A device is said to be SNMP compatible if it can be monitored or controlled using SNMP messages. Related to RSSI, a measurement of the intended signal being transmitted against the other entities that can interfere with the signal. Small, remote office with a MAN or WAN connection back to a larger corporate network and/or the Internet. A document outlining the general activities that must be conducted in order to complete the installation and commissioning tasks for a Ripwave Base Station See RSSI. Computer instructions or data. A circuit card in the Navini BTS digital shelf that provides a local oscillator and system clock with a single calibration transceiver. The card is used to calibrate the Base Station so that no external spectrum analyzer or signal generator is required. Digital packets or signals that are sent at the same, precisely clocked fixed rate of speed. Part #40-00047-01 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 17 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 1 Navini Networks, Inc. Term TCC Stands For.... 1Traffic Channel or 2Transmission Control Code TCP Transport Control Protocol TCP/IP Transport Control Protocol/Internet Protocol TDD Time Division Duplex TFFS True Flash File System TTL Tx UBR UDP Time-to-live Transmit Unspecified Bit Rate User Datagram Protocol UL UpLink USB Universal Serial Bus VBW VCC VCI VCL VDC Vector VPC VP Video Band Width Virtual Channel Circuit Virtual Channel Identifier Virtual Channel Link Volts Direct Current Vector Virtual Private Channel Virtual Path Meaning 1A portion of a radio channel used to enable transmission of one direction of a digitized voice conversation (as opposed to the Voice Channel). 2A way of segregating traffic in order to define controlled communities of interest among subscribers. A standardized transport protocol between IP-based network nodes that allows two hosts to establish a connection and exchange streams of data. TCP operates on top of Internet Protocols and handles the multiplexing of sessions, error recovery, reliability and flow; it guarantees packets are delivered in the same order in which they were sent. A set of protocols that allows cooperating computers to share resources across the network. TCP provides the reliability in the transmission, while IP provides connectionless packet service. A digital transmission method that combines signals from multiple sources and allows a single channel to alternately carry data in each direction of a link. Memory in a computing device that does not lose its information when powered off. Available as a SIMM or PCMCIA card, it usually stores router Operating System (OS) software. Can be easily updated. A field in the Internet Protocol that specifies how many more hops a packet can travel before being discarded or returned. To send by wire or other medium electronically or through air via electromagnetic waves to a receiving communications device. One of the two service categories available for the Management PVC in the ATM/T1 BTS configuration (the other one is CBR) A communications protocol that offers a limited amount of service when messages are exchanged between computers in a network that uses the Internet Protocol (IP). UDP is an alternative to the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP.) Describes the direction of signal flow being sent from a subscriber to a network system, as in from a mobile device (CPE) to a base station. An external bus standard for plug-and-play interfaces between a computer and add-on devices, such as a mouse, modem, keyboard, etc. One USB port can connect up to 127 devices. See p.100 AKA, Virtual Channel Connection or Virtual Circuit Connection. A logical circuit made up of Virtual Channel Links, which carry data between two end points in an ATM network. A 16-bit value in the ATM cell header that provides a unique identifier for the Virtual Channel that carries that particular cell. A connection between two ATM devices. A quantity representative of both magnitude and direction
(energy + orientation in space) AKA, Virtual Path Connection. A grouping of Virtual Channel Connectors, which share one or more contiguous VPLs. A set of Virtual Channels grouped together between cross-points
(i.e., switches). 18 Part #40-00047-01 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 1 Term VPI Stands For.... Virtual Path Identifier VPL Virtual Path Link WAN 1Wide Area Network or 2Wireless Access Network Meaning An 8-bit value in the cell header that identifies the VP as well as the VC to which the cell belongs. The VPI + VCI identify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches. A group of unidirectional VCLs with the same end points in a Virtual Path. Grouping VCLs into VPLs reduces the number of connections to be managed. One or more VPLs makes up a VPC. 1A communications network that spans geographically separate areas and which provide long-haul services. Examples of inter-
networked connections are frame relay, SMDS, and X.25 protocols. 2 General term for any product primarily used to gain access to the Internet, as opposed to being part of the actual Internet devices or software. WCS WEC Wireless Communication Service Licensed band around 2.3 GHz WAN Ethernet Controller Process created during BTS booting and attached to the stack to perform RFC1483 Ethernet bridging onto the ATM interface. Part #40-00047-01 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 19 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 1 Navini Networks, Inc. Chapter 1: Overview Ripwave Description A Ripwave system has three main components: the Customer Premise Equipment (CPE); the Base Station; and the Element Management System (EMS). The Base Station performs the CPE registration and call processing, and provides the interface between the backhaul network and the EMS. It is made up of the Base Transceiver Station (BTS) and the Radio Frequency Subsystem
(RFS) (Figure 1). This manual provides the guidelines and instructions for installing and commissioning (I&C) the Base Station. Figure 1: Base Station Installation (Combo and Split-Chassis Configurations) Omni or Panel Antenna Omni or Panel Antenna PSX-ME PSX-ME PSX-ME Surge Surge Protectors Protectors DGXZ+06NFNF-A DGXZ+06NFNF-A DGXZ+06NFNF-A GPS GPS Surge Surge Protector Protector RF cables RF cables RF Shelf RF Shelf Frame Frame P&D cable Polyphasor P&D cable Polyphasor Digital Shelf Digital Shelf Rectifiers (24 VDC, 60 A) Rectifiers (24 VDC, 60 A) l l e e b b a a c c l l a a C C Surge Surge Protectors Protectors PSX PSXPSX P P o o w w e e r r
D D a a t t a a c c a a b b e e l l Ethernet Ethernet 110 VAC 110 VAC GPS Antenna GPS Antenna Power & Data Power & Data Cable Surge Cable Surge Protector Protector Demarc. Demarc. Lightening Lightening Ground Ground Antenna Antenna Bracket Bracket Grounding Grounding kits for kits for Coax Cable Coax Cable 20 Part #40-00047-01 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 1 Figure 2: Base Station Installation (TTA Configuration with Built-In Surge Protection) Lightning Lightning Ground Ground Antenna Antenna Bracket Bracket Omni or Panel Antenna Omni or Panel Antenna Power Amplifiers Power Amplifiers Built-in Surge Protectors Built-in Surge Protectors GPS Antenna GPS Antenna Built-in Built-in Surge Protectors Surge Protectors S S P P G G RF RF Cal Cal Digital Shelf Digital Shelf Rectifiers (24 VDC, 60 A) Rectifiers (24 VDC, 60 A) Frame Frame Demarc. Demarc. Ethernet Ethernet 110 VAC 110 VAC Figure 3: Base Station Installation (TTA Configuration with Ancillary Surge Protection) Lightning Lightning Ground Ground Antenna Antenna Bracket Bracket Omni or Panel Antenna Omni or Panel Antenna Power Amplifiers Power Amplifiers Built-in Surge Protectors Built-in Surge Protectors Ancillary Surge Protectors Ancillary Surge Protectors GPS Antenna GPS Antenna Built-in Built-in Surge Protectors Surge Protectors RF RF GPS GPS Cal Cal Digital Shelf Digital Shelf Rectifiers (24 VDC, 60 A) Rectifiers (24 VDC, 60 A) Frame Frame Demarc. Demarc. Ethernet Ethernet 110 VAC 110 VAC Part #40-00047-01 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 21 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 1 Procedural Documents & Forms You will refer to other Ripwave documents, procedures, and forms in the process of installing and commissioning the Base Station. The product documentation is provided on the Ripwave Standard Documentation CD (Table 1). As well, the EMS manuals can be viewed on-line through the EMS Server and Client applications. Table 1: Ripwave Standard Documentation CD Order Number 95-00116-00 Component or Part Number Format MSWord/.pdf 40-00016-03 MS Word/.pdf 40-00017-00 MS Word/.pdf 40-00147-00 MS Word/.pdf 40-00031-00 MS Word/.pdf 40-00016-01 MS Word/.pdf 40-00016-02 MS Word/.pdf 40-00033-00 MS Word/.pdf 00-00046-00 MS Word/.pdf 40-00032-00 MS Word/.pdf 40-00112-00 MS Word/.pdf 40-00098-00 MS Word/.pdf 40-00096-00 MS Word/.pdf 40-00111-00 MS Word/.pdf 40-00097-00 40-00099-00 MS Word/.pdf Varies w/each release MS Word/.pdf EMS Overview Manual EMS Software Installation Guide EMS-OSS Integration Guide EMS Administration Guide Ripwave Configuration Guide EMS CLI Reference Manual Ripwave Alarm Resolution Reference Manual System Operations, Maintenance & Troubleshooting Guide*
EMS Diagnostic Tools Guide Ripwave Modem Quick Installation Guide English Spanish Ripwave Modem User Guide English Spanish Customer Release Notes
*Available 4Q03 A separate CD specifically created for personnel involved with installation and commissioning of the Ripwave system, called VAR Documentation CD, may be ordered by authorized VARS, and business partners. The CD includes detailed procedures and electronic forms that Navini uses during the I&C process. Table 2 contains a partial listing of the files on this CD. The I&C forms found on the CD are referenced throughout this manual. Table 2: VAR Documentation CD Order Number 95-00017-00 Site Candidate Evaluation Form RFS System Test Form Base Station Calibration Verification Form Drive Study Survey Form Location (FTP) Test Form Customer Acceptance Form BTS Outdoor Selection Guide Rectifier/Battery Backup Specification Part Number 40-00091-00 40-00093-00 40-00059-00 40-00076-00 40-00077-00 40-00117-00 44-00035-00 44-00036-00 Format Excel Spreadsheet Excel Spreadsheet Excel Spreadsheet Excel Spreadsheet Excel Spreadsheet MS Word Document MS Word/.pdf MS Word/.pdf 22 Part #40-00047-01 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 1 Site Selection, Design, and Preparation Physical Installation Commissioning, with Acceptance Testing and Sign-off High-level I&C Process To put the I&C activities in the context of overall system deployment, Figure 4 provides a flow of the key activities that are performed prior to and during the installation and commissioning of the Ripwave Base Station. Post-I&C, the system that has been installed and commissioned goes through Acceptance Testing against the customers objectives for that site. Once customer sign-
off on the site is achieved, the customer becomes fully responsible for operating the system. Different job holders may perform various portions of these activities and not necessarily all of the activities. In fact, Marketing and Engineering personnel typically handle the earlier tasks, while installation may be a stand-alone function. Commissioning may or may not be handled by the same people who designed or installed the site. Regardless of who does them, these key activities have to be accomplished for successful deployment:
Prior to installation, Navini and the customer formulate a Project Plan and Responsibility Assignment Matrix (RAM) to clarify who will do what to complete the I&C activities. If requested by the customer, Navini may provide personnel, procedures, forms, and/or tools required to install and commission the Base Station equipment. They may also provide special commissioning software programs, computers, and any other special test equipment required. As part of the I&C duties, all testing results are recorded and kept for the customer to review and approve. These test results include the cable sweeps, the BTS Calibration Verification, RF System Tests, Drive Study, Line-of-Sight (LOS) FTP tests, and Non-Line-of-Sight (NLOS) FTP test results. The I&C Supervisor provides site tracking and weekly status reports. All of these tasks can be negotiated with the customer. If Navini Networks is hired by a customer to provide Installation & Commissioning Services, involvement and some actual deliverables are still required by the customer. For example, the customer will need to review or perhaps even explain their Site Design Specifications, approve Logistics Plans, provide shipping information, approve the Network Architecture Plan, etc. As part of a successful hand-off from Navini to the customer, it is usually necessary for Navini to provide some product training to customer personnel who will support the Base Station operation on-going. Customers may opt to take on a Train-the-Trainer program, in which case Navini certifies the customers instructors who then provide staff training thereafter. Part #40-00047-01 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 23 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 1 Navini Networks, Inc. Phase I: Pre-installation - Site Selection, Design & Preparation 1 - Complete the Project Plan for this deployment. <Program or Project Manager>
3 - Conduct a site survey, filling out the Site Candidate Evaluation Form. BEGIN 2 - Generate a coverage prediction map.
<RF Engineering>
Figure 4: High Level I&C Process Flowchart A 5 - Acquire information about the final site selected by the customer. Physical site design completed. 4 - Complete the Interference Analysis, following the Interference Sweep Procedure or, if available, using the Interference Sweep Tool. Appendix A:
Sample Statement of Work (SoW) Appendix B:
Sample Responsibility Assignment Matrix (RAM) Appendix C:
Sample Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) Appendix D:
Site Candidate Evaluation Form Appendix E:
Interference Sweep Procedure Appendix F:
Interference Sweep Tool Appendix G:
BTS Specifications Appendix H:
RFS Data Sheets Appendix I:
BTS Outdoor Enclosure Mfrs. Appendix J:
Rectifier/BBU Manufacturers Appendix K:
Sample Base Station Drawing 24 Part #40-00047-01 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 1 Phase I: Pre-installation - Site Selection, Design & Preparation, continued A 6 - Complete the Network Architecture design.
<Network Planning>
7 - Antenna Power & Cable selection. 8 - Develop a Bill of Materials (BoM).
<Customer >
9 - Acquire the materials. <Customer>
10 - Confirm the customer backhaul, EMS Server, FTP Server, input power and grounding are installed and operational at site. Appendix L:
Antenna Power & Cable Selection Procedure &
Form Appendix M:
Sample BoM Part #40-00047-01 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 25 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 1 Navini Networks, Inc. Phase II: Installation 1 - From the shipping containers received at the customer site, gather Manufacturings inventory sheet and test data that was collected before the BTS & RFS equipment shipped. Verify all equipment arrived (inventory it), serial numbers match paperwork, and the test data is available. Keep this as part of the customer site records. 2 - Install all system buss bars and surge protectors. 3 - Cut cables. Install connectors on cables. 4 - Install & sweep the RF cables. Record results on the RFS System Test Form. 5 - Install & sweep the GPS cables. 6 - Test & install the data/power cable. 7 - If required, install the BTS mounting rack. 8 - Install the BTS chassis. 9 - Install & verify the BTS & RFS grounding. A Appendix N:
Install Connectors Appendix O:
RFS System Test Appendix P:
Chassis Alarms Information Appendix Q:
Sample Tri-sector BTS Grounding Drawing 26 Part #40-00047-01 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 1 Phase II: Installation, continued A 10 - Install & verify the DC input power source to the BTS. Appendix R:
Sample Tri-sector BTS Power Drawing 11 - Install the GPS antennas. 12 - Sweep the RFS, per the Single Antenna Test Procedure. Record the results & the RFS serial numbers on the RFS System Test Form
(same form as Step 3, Appendix O). 13 - Install the RFS & surge protectors and Connect cables to the RFS. 14 - Sweep the installed RFS & cables to verify connections & cable loss. Record results on the RFS System Test Form (same form as Steps 3 & 11, Appendix O). 15 - Verify that the digital cards & RF/PA cards are installed and seated properly. 16 - Record the serial & version numbers of the digital and RF/PA cards on the Base Station Installation Certification Form. B Appendix S:
Single Antenna Test Procedure Appendix T:
Base Station Installation Certification Form Part #40-00047-01 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 27 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 1 Navini Networks, Inc. Phase II: Installation, continued B 17 - If required in the Responsibility Assignment Matrix (RAM) portion of the Project Plan, test the backhaul to the customer demarcation point. 18 - Provide a printed package of the measured results and equipment inventory to the customer on-site. 19 - Go over the results using the printed package and obtain customer sign-off on the completion of the Installation portion of the work. Use the Base Station Installation Certification Form for sign-off (same form as Step 15, Appendix T). 28 Part #40-00047-01 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 1 Phase III: Commissioning 1 - Review the customers network plans - i.e., T1 vs Ethernet backhaul. 2 - Are you using the customers EMS Server?
No 3a - Install & configure the Test EMS Server & Client. Connect to the BTS. Appendix U:
Excel Configuration Form Yes 3b - Install & configure the customer EMS Server & Client. Connect to the BTS. 4 - Enter the RFS configuration by running the RFS script that shipped with the antenna equipment. 5 - Verify that all cables are connected. 6 - Power up the BTS & reconfigure the basic Boot Line parameters through the serial port on the CC card. 7 - After the BTS has been powered up at least 15 minutes, perform 3 calibrations. A Part #40-00047-01 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 29 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 1 Navini Networks, Inc. Phase III: Commissioning, continued A 8 - Did it pass calibration?
Yes No 9a - Perform system troubleshooting procedures. 9b - Perform Base Station calibration. Verify and record the measurements on the Base Station Calibration Verification Form. Appendix V:
Base Station Calibration Verification Form 10 - Did it pass calibration verification?
No 11a - Perform system troubleshooting procedures. 11b - Perform local wired Modem test. Yes Appendix W:
Local Modem Test Procedures No - Go to 11a 12 - Did it pass the wired Modem test?
Yes B 30 Part #40-00047-01 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 1 Phase III: Commissioning, continued B 13 - Perform the local over-
the-air (OTA) Modem test. No - Go to 11a No C 14 - Did it pass the OTA Modem test?
Yes 15 -Was the Test EMS used?
Yes 16 - Install & configure the Customer EMS Server & Client. Connect to the BTS. 17 - Verify the EMS Server & BTS connectivity. 18 - Perform calibration. Ensure successful results 3 times. D Part #40-00047-01 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 31 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 1 Navini Networks, Inc. C Phase III: Commissioning, continued D
*Note: Step 19 is performed only if no RF plot is available. 19* - Validate that the GPS &
Constellation Debugger are installed and operational on the Drive Study laptop. Perform a Preliminary Drive Study. Record the results on the Drive Study Form. 20 - Perform the Preliminary LOS Location
(FTP) Test. Complete 3 uploads & 3 downloads at 3 locations. Record the results on the FTP Test Form. 21 - Perform the Preliminary NLOS Location
(FTP) Test. Complete 3 uploads & 3 downloads at 3 locations. Record the results on the FTP Test Form. 22 - Send all preliminary test results to Navini Technical Support for evaluation. Appendix X:
Drive Study Form Appendix Y:
Location (FTP) Test Procedure & Form No 24a - Adjust the RF parameters and troubleshoot. Go back to Step 18, Perform calibration. 23 -Results adequate?
Yes E 32 Part #40-00047-01 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 1 Phase III: Commissioning, continued E 24b - Perform full Drive Study, and record the results on the Drive Study Form. This is used for tuning the model (same form as Step 19, Appendix X). 25 - Perform full LOS Location (FTP) Test. Record the results (same form as Step 20, Appendix Y). 26 - Perform full NLOS Location (FTP) Test. Record the results (same form as Step 20, Appendix Y). 27 - Send test results to Navini Technical Support. 28 - Verify system operation with multiple Modems in use. 29 - Back up the EMS database. 30 - Gather all required documents & forms to create a delivery package for the Customer sign-
off and for the Navini Techical Support database. See Installation Closeout Documentation. 31 - Participate in the Customer sign-off of the Customer Acceptance Form. Appendix Z:
Site Installation Closeout Documentation Appendix AA:
Customer Acceptance Form Part #40-00047-01 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 33 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 1 Navini Networks, Inc. Base Station Components Base Transceiver Station (BTS) The BTS consists of the RF Power Amplifiers (PAs), the digital circuit cards, the backplane, and the mechanical enclosure or housing. It performs the signal processing and RF transmission for the system. There are three types of chassis: Combo, Split, and Tower Top Amplifier (TTA). The Combo Chassis is used primarily with 2.4 GHz systems. The Split Chasses is used for all other
(2.3, 2.5, 2.6 GHz) systems (Figure 5). The TTA is the latest chassis design, and is available at this time for 2.4 and 3.5 GHz systems. The chassis is compartmentalized into two sections - the RF shelf and the Digital shelf. The BTS connects to the network using a 10/100 Base-T Ethernet connection or up to 8 T1 interfaces. Up to three BTS assemblies can be installed per system, depending on the configuration. The BTS specifications are provided in Appendix G. Figure 5: BTS Chassis Split Chassis Split Chassis Combo Chassis Combo Chassis TTA Chassis TTA Chassis f f l l e e h h S S A A P P F F R R
f f l l e e h h S S l l a a t t i i i i g g D D 34 Part #40-00047-01 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 1 Radio Frequency Subsystem (RFS) The Radio Frequency Subsystem (RFS) is mounted on a transmission tower or building rooftop. It transmits and receives data to and from the Ripwave Customer Premise Equipment (CPE) using a digital beamforming transmission technique. The RFS may be either a panel antenna or an omni antenna (Figure 6). The RFS data sheets are provided in Appendix H. An RFS panel transmits in a directional mode, covering a transmit angle of 120 degrees. The antenna can be used as a single mode antenna, or it can be used in a group of two or three sectored antennas, covering 240 and 360 degrees respectively. Each panel requires a BTS to operate. For example, in a tri-sectored cell with 3 panels, you would need 3 BTSs. The omni antenna provides omni-directional coverage of 360 degrees. An RFS panel or omni contains eight (8) antenna elements, cavity filters, and, optionally, low noise amplifiers (LNA). In the TTA configurations, the PAs also are located in the RFS
(antenna) by the LNAs and cavity filters. Figure 6: RFS Omni Omni Panel (front) Panel (front) Panel (side) Panel (side) 3.5 GHz TTA Panel 3.5 GHz TTA Panel Part #40-00047-01 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 35 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 1 Navini Networks, Inc. Global Positioning System (GPS) One Global Positioning System (GPS) antenna is used with each Base Station to provide a timing signal for synchronizaton. A second GPS antenna can be provided for redundancy. The Ripwave Base Station uses the VIC 100 GPS Antenna (Figure 7). Figure7: VIC 100 GPS Antenna Mounting Racks & Enclosures The BTS can be installed indoors or outdoors in industry standard 19- or 23-inch racks. Rack adapters are needed to mount the equipment in a standard 23-inch rack. For outdoor BTSs, the customer can supply any standard enclosure from a multitude of vendors. Appendix I offers suggestions for outdoor BTS enclosures. Figure 8 shows 3 BTSs installed indoors. Figure 8: Indoor BTS (Combo Chassis) Surge arrestor Surge arrestor for GPS cable for GPS cable Buss bar with Buss bar with PSX surge PSX surge arrestors for RF arrestors for RF
& Cal cables
& Cal cables RF Shelf RF Shelf Digital Shelf Digital Shelf Rectifiers Rectifiers 36 Part #40-00047-01 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 1 Figure 9: Indoor BTS (TTA Chassis) QMA QMA connectors connectors Accessibility Ripwave BTS equipment is required to be installed in a restricted access location, in accordance with NEC/CEC standards. Only authorized personnel should have access to this equipment. Part #40-00047-01 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 37 Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 1 Technical Specifications Table 3a: Technical Specifications Frequency Band (GHz) Frequency Band (Name) Frequency Range (GHz) Power Dissipation
(Thermal Load ) Watt BTU per hour TTD 1:1 TTD 3:1 TTD 1:1 TTD 3:1 Rectifier Rating (Watt)*
Circuit Breaker Rating (Amp) Input Voltage Relative Humidity of BTS Operating Environment Operating Temperature (Celsius) Storage Temperature (Celsius) Air Flow (on each shelf) Downlink Uplink Omni 120o Panel Omni 120o Panel Modulation Antenna Downtilt Antenna Gain
(per antenna element) Backhaul interfaces Bandwidth Allocation Duplex Format Navini Networks, Inc. Combo 2.4 2.6 ISM 2.400 2.473 560 725 MMDS 2.602 2.637 850 1150 1910 2900 2475 975 3925 1,500 60 Split 2.3 2.5, 2.6 WCS ITFS/MMDS 2.3052.385 2.5002.596 850 1150 2900 3925 1,500 RF Shelf : 50 Digital Shelf : 20
+21 to 28 VDC TTA 2.4 3.5 ISM 2.400 2.483 292 360 WCS 3.400 3.700 292 360 1000 1000 1230 580 40 1230 580 40 0% to 95% RH, non-condensing 0 to +50o 40 to +70 Fresh air intake along the lower front vertical panel. Air exhaust out of the upper rear of the chassis QPSK, 8PSK & QAM16 QPSK 2 electrical downtilt (fixed) 6 electrical downtilt (fixed) plus 0-10 mechanical uptilt
(adjustable). 12 dBi 17 dBi 10/100 BaseT Ethernet or ATM over T1; up to (8) T1s with or without IMA, long haul support Dynamic Time Division Duplex RF:
14 x 19 x 15.2 Digital:
19.2 x 19 x 12.9 RF: 82 Digital: 33 60 x 15 65 19.2 x 19 x 12.9 36 50 x 10 52 Chassis Mechanical Dimensions in inches
(H x W x D) 30 x 19 x 14 Chassis Weight (lb) 60 Omni Antenna Mechanical Dimensions
(H x Diam.) in inches Omni Antenna Weight (lb)
*The BTS must be connected to a power supply/rectifier that is UL listed.
(continued on the next page) 38 Part #40-00047-01 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 Navini Networks, Inc. Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 1 Split 2.3 2.5, 2.6 46 x 23 64 Vertical TTA 2.4 3.5 38 x 19 50 Multi-carrier Beamforming Synchronous CDMA Forward & reverse, open & closed loop 12 6.4
(4.2 DL, 2.2 UL) 11.6 12 6.0
(4.2 DL, 1.8 UL) 6.4
(4.2 DL, 2.2 UL) Frequency Band (GHz) Combo 2.4 2.6 11.6 Panel Antenna Mechanical Dimensions
(H x W) in inches Panel Antenna Weight (lb) Polarization Multiple Access Scheme Power Control Total System Capacity in Mbps (total raw capacity with QAM16 downlink and QPSK uplink) Base Station Payload Data Rate in Mbps
(with QAM16 downlink and QPSK uplink;
excludes adaptive modulation based on SNR, end to end network retransmissions and Ethernet & IP protocol overhead) BTS Input/Output Specifications Table 3b: BTS Input/Output Specifications
(4.2 DL, 1.8 UL) 6.0 Item Description Termination Expected MAX Length Protection specified in Manual DC +24V Power
+21 to +28V input,
/+ terminals Power Supply/Rectifier customer equipment
<140 FT Rectifier must be UL-
listed, comply with UL60950 or UL60950-1, and have earthed SELV output GND Chassis Ground connection T1 T1 communication lines off CC card Ethernet UART 10/100 BaseT communication off CC card D sub serial connection off CC card, used for on site communications to PC BBU BBU connector can accept up to 4 alarm inputs plus GND. BTS monitors alarms and reports back to EMS condition. Inputs come from dry contacts at the BBU side, normally open circuit, can be closed circuit for alarmed condition. Earth Ground T1s interface switch customer equipment. Typical installation requires DSU or CSU providing loopback capability and primary Type 1 protection.
<140 FT GND required.
>140 FT In-Line Devices such as DSU/CSU/TSU/PPC must be UL497 listed PC/Router/HUB/Gateway
<140 FT Not required PC
<140 FT Not required BBU customer equipment. <140 FT Not required
(continued on the next page) Part #40-00047-01 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003 39 Navini Networks, Inc. Item Description Termination Expected MAX Length Protection specified in Manual Ripwave Base Station I&C Guide Chapter 1 Cabinet alarms: Door open and HMC alarms plus 2 GND inputs. BTS monitors alarms and reports back to the EMS condition. Inputs come from dry contacts in the cabinet, which are normally open circuit, can be closed circuit for alarmed condition. TDD sync is a TTL Sync pulse at a 10 ms cycle rate, 0 to +5V swing, which is 5 ? s long in width. This output of BTS is used for equipment debugging and to synchronize test equipment. The GPS coax cable carriers
+5V DC and 1.57 GHz RF signal to be connected to GPS antenna LNA. RF is an input to BTS; DC is an output from BTS. This coax cable is an RF signal path to the RFS. Signal is a low power signal from 2.1 to 2.5 GHz. These coax cables are RF signal path to the RFS. Signal frequency from 2.3 to 2.7 GHz. This cable is a 6-twisted pair bundled cable used for sending low current DC voltage to the RFS at +8 to +12V as well as RS485 digital bus for TDD control. Cabinet Alarms TDD SYNC Antenna A/B GPS
(2) RFS Calibration Cable (1) RFS Antenna Cables (8) Power/Data Cable (1) Cabinet customer equipment.
<140 FT Not required Test equipment such as oscilloscope or analyzer equipment GPS antenna/LNA, which is normally located at BTS or on HUT of BTS, not on tower.
<140 FT Not required
<140 FT Not required RFS connection to BTS
>140 FT RFS connection to BTS
>140 FT RFS Connection to BTS
>140 FT Lightning protection devices must be UL497 listed Lightning protection devices must be UL497 listed Lightning protection devices must be UL497 listed 40 Part #40-00047-01 Rev F v1.0 (TTA) October 23, 2003
1 | User Installation Manual | Users Manual | 248.36 KiB |
Ripwave 2.4 GHz Base Station Hardware Installation and Commissioning Guide Version 1.0.1 Part Number 40-00019-00 Revision B Ripwave 2.4 GHz Base Station Installation and Commissioning Guide Navini Networks, Inc. I Ripwave 2.4 GHz Base Station Installation and Commissioning Guide Navini Networks, Inc. TABLE OF CONTENTS REGULATORY INFORMATION..............................................................................................VI SAFETY........................................................................................................................................ VII Introduction.........................................................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Purpose ................................................................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Scope ....................................................................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Acronyms.............................................................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Electronic Forms.................................................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. CHAPTER 1.................................................................... ERROR! BOOKMARK NOT DEFINED. Ripwave 2.4 GHz Base Station System Installation.........................Error! Bookmark not defined. Ripwave 2.4 GHz Base Station Equipment ......................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Base Transceiver Station (BTS) ...................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Omni Directional Radio Frequency Subsystem (RFS).................Error! Bookmark not defined. Mounting Rack and Enclosures ....................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Equipment Materials Specifications .................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Ripwave 2.4 GHz Base Station Specifications..................................Error! Bookmark not defined. General..........................................................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Five watt System...........................................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Resources .............................................................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Preparing the Site ...............................................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Site Survey....................................................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Backhaul Connections ..................................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Power Requirements for the BTS .................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Ground Requirements for the BTS ...............................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Installing the Antenna Ground Buss Bar ......................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Installing the Base Station System Ground Buss Bar and Surge Protectors .....Error! Bookmark not defined. Installing the System Ground Wiring...........................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Installing Cables between the BTS and the RFS/GPS..................Error! Bookmark not defined. Determining Cable Length........................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Installing Connectors on the Cables .........................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Sweeping the Individual Cables ...............................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Installing the BTS Mounting Rack and/or Enclosure...................Error! Bookmark not defined. II Ripwave 2.4 GHz Base Station Installation and Commissioning Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Installing the BTS Power Supply and Batteries............................Error! Bookmark not defined. Installing the Power Supply......................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Installing the Batteries ..............................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Connecting the Power Supply to the Batteries .........................Error! Bookmark not defined. Run Power Supply Wiring to the BTS Chassis ............................Error! Bookmark not defined. Installing the BTS Equipment ...........................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Installing the BTS Chassis............................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Connect the Power Supply to the BTS Chassis ............................Error! Bookmark not defined. Check Ground Connections and Input Power...............................Error! Bookmark not defined. Ground Connections .................................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Power Connections ...................................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Installing the GPS Antennas..............................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Installing the Antenna Mount and Radio Frequency Subsystem Antenna Assembly .......Error!
Bookmark not defined. Installing the Antenna Mount .......................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Verify RFS Operation...................................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Installing the RFS Antenna Assembly..........................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Install the Surge Protectors on the RFS........................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Install the Cables Between the RFS and the BTS.........................Error! Bookmark not defined. Install Grounding Kit on Cables ...................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Connect Ground Wires to the Ground Buss Bar...........................Error! Bookmark not defined. Testing the RFS and Cables..........................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Weatherize Outdoor Connections.................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Connecting the RF cables and Alarms to the BTS .......................Error! Bookmark not defined. Install the BTS Circuit Cards into the Chassis................................Error! Bookmark not defined. CHAPTER 2.................................................................... ERROR! BOOKMARK NOT DEFINED. BTS System Test and Commissioning ..............................................Error! Bookmark not defined. BTS System Power Up and Provisioning..........................................Error! Bookmark not defined. BTS Provisioning Configuration .......................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. BTS Configuration Setup..............................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. BTS Power Up and Configuration................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Standard boot initialization sequence .......................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Invoking BTS Configuration ....................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Boot Prompt..............................................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Ethernet WAN Configuration...................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. T1/ATM WAN Configuration..................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. T1/IMA WAN Configuration ...................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Boot sequence line items ..........................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Calibration of the BTS .......................................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. III Ripwave 2.4 GHz Base Station Installation and Commissioning Guide Navini Networks, Inc. RF Sanity Test.....................................................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Equipment Required .....................................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Loss Procedure for Test Cable......................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Receive verification ......................................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Transmitter verification ................................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Drive Study Procedures......................................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Drive Test .....................................................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Equipment required...................................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Drive Test Procedure ................................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Location Test ................................................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Equipment required...................................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Location Testing Procedure......................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. EMS Commissioning ..........................................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. BTS Commissioning for the Primary EMS......................................Error! Bookmark not defined. APPENDIX A: RFS AND CABLE TESTING............ ERROR! BOOKMARK NOT DEFINED. Introduction.........................................................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Testing the RFS Data/Power Cable...................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Required Equipment .....................................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Continuity test with VOM ............................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Continuity test with Power/Data cable tester................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Sweep Test of the RF cables and the RFS ........................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Required Equipment .....................................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Calibration of test setup ................................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. RF Cable Insertion Loss ...............................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. Navini RFS Test Box setup ..........................................................Error! Bookmark not defined. RFS only Transmit (TX) Mode Verification ................................Error! Bookmark not defined. RFS only Receive (RX) Mode Verification .................................Error! Bookmark not defined. RFS and Cables, Transmit (TX) mode verification......................Error! Bookmark not defined. RFS and Cables, Receive (RX) Mode Verification......................Error! Bookmark not defined. IV Ripwave 2.4 GHz Base Station Installation and Commissioning Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Permissions, trademarks, and distribution Copyright November 2001 - 2002, Navini Networks, Inc. All information contained herein and disclosed by this document is confidential and the proprietary property of Navini Networks, Inc. and all rights therein are expressly reserved. Acceptance of this material signifies agreement by the recipient that the information contained in this document is confidential and that it will be used solely for the purposes set forth herein. Acceptance of this material signifies agreement by the recipient that it will not be used, reproduced in whole or in part, disclosed, distributed, or conveyed to others in any manner or by any means graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, taping, or information storage and retrieval systems without the express written permission of Navini Networks, Inc. Navini Networks, Internet at the Speed of Thought, zero-install, and Ripwave are registered trademarks of Navini Networks, Inc. Other product and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks and/or service marks of their respective owners. Nothing herein constitutes any representation, warranty, assurance, or guaranty of any kind. Because of continuing developments and improvements in design, manufacturing, and deployment, material in this document is subject to change without notification and does not represent any commitment or obligation on the part of Navini Networks, Inc. Navini Networks, Inc. shall have no liability for any error or damages resulting from the use of this document. The logo and all other Navini Networks trademarks are the property of Navini Networks, Inc. Unauthorized usage is strictly prohibited without the express written permission of Navini Networks, Inc. 2001 2002 Navini Networks, Inc. All rights reserved. V Ripwave 2.4 GHz Base Station Installation and Commissioning Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Regulatory Information FCC Compliance and Advisory Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class A digital device, Pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. The operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at their own expense. INFORMATION TO USER Any changes or modifications of equipment not expressly approved by Navini Networks could void the users authority to operate the equipment and the companys warranty. WARNING: This device is intended to be used with an antenna professionally installed on a fixed, outdoor structure. A minimum separation distance of 1.5 meters should be maintained in order to ensure compliance with the FCC rules for Radio Frequency Exposure. Installation where this minimum distance cannot be maintained may result in exposure to RF levels that exceed the FCC limits and is discouraged. VI Ripwave 2.4 GHz Base Station Installation and Commissioning Guide Navini Networks, Inc. Safety To optimize safety and expedite installation and service, read this document thoroughly. Follow all warnings, cautions, and instructions marked on the equipment and/or included in this document. Navini Networks, Inc. expressly requires that only technically qualified and authorized personnel be allowed to install, service, or operate the equipment. To aid in the prevention of injury and damage to property, cautionary symbols have been placed in this document to alert the reader to known potentially hazardous situations, equipment, or procedures. The symbols are placed before the procedures to which they apply. However, any situation that involves heavy equipment and/or electricity can become hazardous, and caution and safety should be practiced at all times when installing, servicing, or operating the equipment. VII
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2004-01-16 | 2403.5 ~ 2477.5 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Original Equipment |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 | Effective |
2004-01-16
|
||||
1 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Cisco Systems, Inc
|
||||
1 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0018679845
|
||||
1 | Physical Address |
125 W Tasman
|
||||
1 |
San Jose, California 95134
|
|||||
1 |
United States
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 | Grantee Code |
PL6
|
||||
1 | Equipment Product Code |
ISM-BTS-R2
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 | Name |
G******** T****
|
||||
1 | Title |
Manager , EMC Standards and Operations
|
||||
1 | Telephone Number |
408-5********
|
||||
1 | Fax Number |
408-5********
|
||||
1 |
g******@cisco.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
1 | Firm Name |
Nemko USA
|
||||
1 | Name |
T****** T****
|
||||
1 | Physical Address |
802 N. Kealy
|
||||
1 |
Lewisville, Texas 75057-3136
|
|||||
1 |
United States
|
|||||
1 | Telephone Number |
972-4******** Extension:
|
||||
1 | Fax Number |
972-4********
|
||||
1 |
t******@nemkona.com
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
1 | Firm Name |
Nemko USA
|
||||
1 | Name |
T****** T****
|
||||
1 | Physical Address |
802 N. Kealy
|
||||
1 |
Lewisville, Texas 75057-3136
|
|||||
1 |
United States
|
|||||
1 | Telephone Number |
972-4******** Extension:
|
||||
1 | Fax Number |
972-4********
|
||||
1 |
t******@nemkona.com
|
|||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Equipment Class | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||||
1 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | ISM band BTS with 17 dBi Panel Antenna | ||||
1 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
1 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Grant Comments | This device must be professionally installed. Output power is conducted at each antenna. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be fixed-mounted on outdoor permanent structures with a separation distance of at least 1.5 meters from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Users and installers must be provided with antenna installation and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. | ||||
1 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 | Firm Name |
Nemko Dallas, Inc.
|
||||
1 | Name |
M**** C******
|
||||
1 | Telephone Number |
972-4********
|
||||
1 | Fax Number |
972-4********
|
||||
1 |
@******@.
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15C | CE | 2403.50000000 | 2477.50000000 | 0.1700000 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC